The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutB09-0321 project manual (Division 07 to end) volume 1 of 2f � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET �� VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � SECTION 07115- BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 3. Cold-applied, emulsified-asphalt dampproofing. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Sections "Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing" and "Hot Fluid-Applied Waterproofing"for waterproofing. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include recommendations for method of application, primer, number of coats, coverage or thickness, and protection course. B. Material Certificates: For each product, signed by manufacturers. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers through one source from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit dampproofing to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions. PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.4 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING E. Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1. F. VOC Content: 0.25 Ib/gal. or less. BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07115-1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO . � F � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET �: VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 k : � { 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS � f D. Patching Compound: Manufacturer's fibered mastic of type recommended by � dampproofing manufacturer. � � £ PART 3-EXECUTION � � 3.1 EXAMINATION s s � A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for surface : smoothness and other conditions affecting performance of work. ; � � 1. Proceed with dampproofing application only after substrate construction and � penetrating work have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been � corrected. � fi 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protection of Other Work: Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from ;' being stained, spotted, or coated with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials from g entering and clogging weep holes and drains. �� F B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to work; fill voids, seal joints, � and apply bond breakers if any, as recommended by prime material manufacturer. � �; C. Apply patching compound for filling and patching tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other � imperfections. � 3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations unless more stringent requirements r` are indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory performance of = dampproofing. ; 1. Apply additional coats if recommended by manufacturer or if required to achieve coverages indicated. 2. Allow each coat of dampproofing to cure 24 hours, or as recommended by manufacturer, before applying subsequent coats. 3.6 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING � F. On Concrete and Masonry Backup for Adhered Stone Masonry : Apply by spray coat at a rate not less than 1 gal./100 sq.ft. Brush or roller application is not acceptable. 3.8 CLEANING A. Remove dampproofing materials from surfaces not intended to receive dampproofing. � ' BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07115-2 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 END OF SECTION 07115 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07115-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � 4 4 FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � j C d X � L � BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07115-4 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 07141 -COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Inciudes: 1. Latex-rubber waterproofing. � 2. Molded-sheet drainage panels. 3. Engineered drainage composite. 4. Insulation. B. Related Section: 1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"for joint-sealant materials and installation. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing. B. Qualification Data: For Installer. C. Product Test Reports: For waterproofing, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that is approved and licensed by waterproofing manufacturer for installation of waterproofing required for this Project. B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review waterproofing requirements including surface preparation, substrate condition and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special details and flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures,and protection and repairs. COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07141 - 1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � t FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING � A. Deliver liquid materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken, labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, shelf life, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. f' B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer. C. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life. D. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS � A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and � substrate temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp, wet or frozen substrate unless acceptable to manufacturer, when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or when temperatures are less than 5 deg F above dew point. 1. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when such weather conditions are imminent during application and curing period. B. Maintain adequate ventilation during application and curing of waterproofing materials. � 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which waterproofing Y manufacturer agree to repair or replace waterproofing that does not comply with ' requirements or that fails to remain watertight within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include failure of waterproofing due to failure of substrate prepared and treated according to requirements or formation of new joints and cracks in substrate that exceed 1/16 inch in width. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Installer's Warranty: Specified form, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, for warranty period of five years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LATEX-RUBBER WATERPROOFING A. Two-Component, Unreinforced, Latex-Rubber Waterproofing: Comply with ASTM C 836 and with manufacturer's written physical requirements. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07141 -2 � � OZ Architecture Boulder,CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 a. Grace,W. R. & Co.; Procor 75/20. 2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials recommended by manufacturer to be compatible with one another and with waterproofing, as demonstrated by waterproofing manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Waterstop Strip: Hydrophilic strip. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Grace,W. R. �Co.; Adcor ES. 2. Locations: a. Joints between footings and foundation walls where top of footing is less than 12 inches from bottom of floor slabs-on-grade. C. Joint Reinforcing Strip: Manufacturer's recommended fiberglass mesh or polyester fabric. D. Joint Sealant: Multicomponent polyurethane sealant, compatible with waterproofing, .. complying with ASTM C 920 Type M, Class 25; Grade NS for sloping and vertical applications or Grade P for deck applications; Use NT exposure; and as recommended by manufacturer for substrate and joint conditions. 1. Backer Rod: Closed-cell polyethylene foam. 2.3 .MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS A. Nonwoven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite subsurface drainage panels consisting of a nonwoven, needle-punched geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 70 sieve laminated to one side with a polymeric film bonded to the other side of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core,with a vertical flow rate of 9 to 15 gpm per ft.. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: e. Grace,W. R. 8�Co.; Hydroduct 220. 2.4 ENGINEERED DRAINAGE COMPOSITE A. Flexible composite composed of a drainage core, a geotextile fabric, and a high- strength backing film, providing a high-flow system to remove accumulating foundation water. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07141 -3 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO 9 + z FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 a. Grace, W. R. &Co.; Hydroduct Coil 600. � � 2.5 INSULATION A. Board Insulation: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, shiplap edged. 1. Type IV, 25-psi minimum compressive strength. 2. Thickness: Minimum 2 inches. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 4 1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. 2. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary �� moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. f; 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. � 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clean and prepare substrate according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application. � B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage or overspray affecting other construction. C. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, and other voids. 3.3 PREPARATION AT TERMINATIONS AND PENETRATIONS A. Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at expansion joints, drains, and sleeves according to ASTM C 1471 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. When recommended by manufacturer, apply waterproofing in two separate applications. Embed a joint reinforcing strip in the first preparation coat when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. COLD FLUID-A _ � PPLIED WATERPROOFING 07141 4 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 3.4 JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT A. Prepare, treat, rout, and fiil joints and cracks in substrate according to ASTM C 1471 and waterproofing manufacturers written instructions. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks, complying with ASTM D 4258, before coating surfaces. 1. Comply with ASTM C 1193 for joint-sealant installation. 2. Apply bond breaker between sealant and preparation strip. 3. Prime substrate and apply a single thickness of preparation strip extending a minimum of 3 inches along each side of joint. Apply waterproofing in finro separate applications and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the first preparation coat. 3.5 WATERPROOFING APPLICATION A. Apply waterproofing according to ASTM C 1471 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Start installing waterproofing in presence of manufacturer's technical representative. C. Unreinforced Waterproofing Applications: Mix materials and apply waterproofing by spray, roller, notched squeegee,trowel, or other application method suitable to slope of substrate. 1. Apply one or more coats of waterproofing to obtain a seamless membrane free of entrapped gases, with a minimum dry film thickness of 60 mils and a minimum dry film thickness of 120 mils at detail areas. 2. Apply waterproofing to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces. 3. Verify wet film thickness of waterproofing every 100 sq. ft.. D. Install protection course with butted joints over nominally cured membrane before starting subsequent construction operations. 1. Molded-sheet drainage panels may be used in place of a separate protection course to vertical applications when approved by waterproofing manufacturer. 3.6 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall or deck substrate, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesives or mechanical fasteners that do not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile fabric to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction. 3.7 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Install one or more layers of board insulation to achieve required thickness over waterproofed surfaces. Cut and fit to within 3/4 inch of projections and penetrations. COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07141 -5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � 5 FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET �� VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 B. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive applied according to � manufacturer's written instructions. Use type of adhesive recommended in writing by insulation manufacturer. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Engage a full time site representative qualified by the waterproofing membrane : manufacturer to inspect substrate conditions, surface preparation, and application of t the membrane, flashings, protection, and drainage components; and to furnish daily 4 reports to Architect. B. Owner may engage an independent testing agency to observe flood testing and � examine underside of decks and terminations for evidence of leaks during flood testing. 3.9 CURING, PROTECTION, AND CLEANING A. Cure waterproofing according to manufacturer's written recommendations, taking care ' to prevent contamination and damage during application stages and curing. 1. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane. ; B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. C. Protect installed board insulation from damage due to ultraviolet light, harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Immediately after installation, provide � temporary coverings where insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction. D. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 07141 , � 3 COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07141 -6 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO ''s FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 07142 - HOT FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING PART1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Substrate primers. 2. Reinforced waterproofing membranes. 3. Protection courses. 4. Drainage courses. �6. Deck pavers on sand bed. • 2 B. Areas to receive waterproofing include but are not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Decks over occupied spaces. C. Related Sections include the following: � = 1. Division 2 Section "Interlockinq Concrete Pavers" for deck qavers and sand � bed installed over hot fluid-applied waterproofina at Leve12 Balconv. 2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"for joint-sealant materials and installation. 3. Division 15 Sections for coordination with deck drainaae. 4. Division 16 Sections for snowmelt svstems installed below deck pavers. . �.� RE�C�1�11AAAIf`C �CAl11D€�C�Co � n �s�� • f f � �BVff1'F�— 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate,technical data, and tested physical and performance properties. � , , , . 2 � , D. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that installers comply with requirements. HOT FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07142-1 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified independent testing agency indicating and � interpreting test results of waterproofing for compliance with requirements, based on 3 comprehensive testing of current waterproofing formulations. x F. Sample Warranty: Copy of special waterproofing manufacturer's and Installer's warranty stating obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions before starting waterproofing. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE �A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who is authorized and approved � '� 2 manufacturer;eNiser�se� to install waterproofing manufacturer's products; and who is eligible to receive waterproofing warranty specified. B. Source Limitations: Obtain waterproofing materials, protection course, and drainage panels � �: through one source from a single manufacturer. . . . £ � , , 2 , , t D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review requirements for waterproofing, including surface preparation specified under other Sections, substrate condition and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special � E details and sheet flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and protection and repairs. € 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING € . x A. Deliver liquid materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken, labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer. C. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life. D. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS �A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet or frozen substrate, or when temperature is below 0 deg F. � 1. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain,fog, or mist. B. Maintain adequate ventilation during application and curing of waterproofing materials. � HOT FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07142-2 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO € FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Manufacturer or Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Manufacturer's Total System Warranty: Written warranty, signed by waterproofing manufacturer and Installer, agreeing to repair or replace waterproofing and sheet flashings that do not comply with requirements or that do not remain watertight within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include failure of waterproofing due to failure of substrate prepared and treated according to requirements or formation of new joints and cracks in substrate that exceed 1/8 inch in width. 4. Warranty includes removing and reinstalling protection board, drainage panels, and insulation, , . � 5. Warrantv does not include toppinq slab removal and replacement. 6. Warranty Periods: a. Horizontal applications: 1) 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturer's . systems that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 3. Horizontal Applications without pavers: a. MM6125-FR, American Hydrotech, Inc. 4. Include all materials, components, and accessories required to provide complete, warranted, watertight assemblies, including but not necessarily limited to hot fluid- applied membranes, reinforcing fabrics, protection courses, and drainage courses. 2.2 MEMBRANE �4 Single-component; 100 percent solids; hot fluid-applied, rubberized asphalt��e � . . . . � � • • . ' . HOT FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07142-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � a FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET f VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 . . . . � . , . , > > . • � , � � , . , z 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Primer: ASTM D 41, asphaltic primer. B. Flashing and Reinforcing Membranes: 1. Uncured Neoprene: a. Minimum Thickness: 60 mils. b. Product: Flex-Flash UN, American Hydrotech. 2. Spunbond Polyester: a. Minimum Weight: 1.3 oz/sq. yd. � b. Product: Flex-Flash F/Vertical, American Hydrotech. 3. Provide saunbound polvester for membrane reinforcina exceqt where uncured � neoprene is recommended bv manufacturer. 2 . . , . C. Protection Course/Separator Sheet: 1. Fiberglass reinforced, rubberized asphalt. 2. Minimum thickness: 85 mils. 3. Product: Hydroflex 30,American Hydrotech. D. Drainage Course: � 1. Premanufactured crush- proof geotextile. 2 2. Product: Hydrodrain 302, American Hydrotech. ' F. Sealants and Accessories: Waterproofing manufacturer's recommended sealants and accessories. � HOT FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07142-4 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. 2. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. �4. Start of work bv Installer constitutes acceptance of substrate and other 2 conditions repuired for successful installation. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and prepare substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application. B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction.. C. Close off deck drains and other deck penetrations to prevent spillage and migration of waterproofing fluids. D. Remove grease, oil, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete. E. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, and other voids. • 3.3 JOINTS, CRACKS, AND TERMINATIONS A. Prepare and treat substrates to receive waterproofing membrane, including joints and cracks, deck drains, corners, and penetrations according to . , �2 ,ar�d waterproofing system manufacturer's written instructions. „ , � �d 1. Rout and fill joints and cracks in substrate. Before filling, remove dust and dirt according to ASTM D 4258. 2. Moving joints and cracks over 1/8-inches in width: Adhere strip of elastomeric sheet to substrate in a layer of hot rubberized asphalt. Extend elastomeric sheet a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm)on each side of moving joints and cracks or joints and cracks exceeding 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick, and beyond deck drains and penetrations. Apply second layer of hot fluid-applied, rubberized asphalt over elastomeric sheet. 3. Non- moving joints and cracks not exceeding 1/8-inch in width: Embed reinforcing fabric into a layer of hot, rubberized asphalt. Extend reinforcing fabric a minimum of 6 inches on each side of joints and cracks and beyond deck drains, corners, and penetrations. HOT FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07142-5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � f FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET '� VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 x B. At expansion joints and discontinuous deck-to-wall or deck-to-deck joints, bridge joints with � � elastomeric sheet extended a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) on each side of joints and � = adhere to substrates in a layer of hot rubberized asphalt. Apply second layer of hot fluid- ; applied, rubberized asphalt over elastomeric sheet. fi 3.4 MEMBRANE APPLICATION A. Apply rubberized asphalt according to " � � � . 2 � , ," manufacturer's written � instructions. B. Heat rubberized asphalt in an oil-or air jacketed melter with mechanical agitator specifically 3 designed for heating rubberized-asphalt waterproofing. � �C. Start application with manufacturer's technical representative present. Test for adhesion of inembrane to substrate before roceedin with installation. D. Apply primer, at manufacturer's recommended rate, over prepared substrate and allow to dry. E. Reinforced Membrane: Apply waterproofing to substrates and adjoining surfaces indicated. Spread hot fluid-applied, rubberized asphalt to a thickness of 90 mils; embed reinforcing fabric, overlapping sheets 2 inches; and spread another 125-mi1- thick layer to provide a uniform, reinforced, seamless membrane 215 mils thick. � G. Apply waterproofing over prepared joints and up wall terminations and vertical surfaces to � heights indicated or required by manufacturer. H. Cover waterproofing with protection course/ separator sheet with overlapped joints while rubberized asphalt is still hot and before membrane is subject to traffic. 3.5 DRAINAGE COURSE INSTALLATION A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall or deck substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use methods that do not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Flood Testing: Flood test each deck area for leaks, according to recommendations in ASTM D 5957, after completing waterproofing but before overlying construction, includinq � drainaqe mat, is placed. Install temporary containment assemblies, plug or dam drains, and flood with potable water. 1. Flood to an average depth of 2-1/2 inches with a minimum depth of 1 inch and not exceeding a depth of 4 inches. Maintain 2 inches of clearance from top of sheet flashings. 2. Flood each area for 48 hours. � HOT FLUID-APPUED WATERPROOFING 07142-6 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 3. After flood testing, repair leaks, repeat flood tests, and make further repairs until waterproofing installation is watertight. B. Owner may engage an independent testing agency to observe flood testing and examine underside of decks and terminations for evidence of leaks during flood testing. 3.9 CURING, PROTECTING, AND CLEANING A. Cure waterproofing according to manufacturer's written recommendations, taking care to prevent contamination and damage during application stages and curing. 1. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane. B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. C. Protect installed drainage panels from damage due to ultraviolet light, harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. D. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 07142 � HOT FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07142-7 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO 3 � Y FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � � � r � HOT FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07142-8 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � t FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 07180-CONCRETE SEALERS PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 Related Documents A. The Conditions of the Contract for Construction and the General Requirements of Division 1 of these Specifications apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 Work Included A. The Work of this Section shall include furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and supervision to install concrete sealer including surface preparation,in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications. 1.3 Related Work A. The following Work is related to this Section: 1. Submittals Section 8�3A8 01330 -� r..,.��,,..., c ..+:,... n�e�n � �es�i�L� �.,...... .,.�._ 3. Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 03300 2 Y T�iV�RT.Y�7VTCC� VCG�i�V�� OV;VV 5. Joint Sealants Section 8�9A8 07920 � P�1fe�ae�1�-AAaflEiffg es.,.•.... nen�n 1.4 Quality Control A. General 1. The sealer Installer shall be approved by the sealer Manufacturer. 2. The sealer Installer shall have a minimum of three (3) years experience in application of one of the approved concrete sealers and have experience for a project in size of 25,000 SF or greater. 3. Manufacturer is to individually code each sealer drum prior to shipping. Each drum is to be specifically and permanently identified with markings provided both on the drum and the removable drum cap (drum seal). A listing of this identification, along with the Manufacturer's invoice, is to be submitted to the Engineer prior to sealer application. Each cap is to be submitted to the Engineer with the appropriate pay request. No payment will be made for material if the properly identified cap is not submitted. CONCRETE SEALERS 07180- 1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � 4 FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 4. The Manufacturer shall make available a qualified Representative to assist the Installer and Engineer as specified herein. The Representative shall be experi- enced in the placement of the sealer.As a minimum,the Representative shall be ? on site to review the following: a. Trial area preparation and sealer installation. b. First phase of concrete surface sealer installation. � 5. Contractor shall notify Engineer 5 days in advance prior to installing sealer. B. Trial Area Requirements x 1. Prepare three 100 SF trial areas of the concrete surface incorporating all of the required preparation.The Engineer,Manufacturer's Representative,and Installer shall be in agreement that the surface preparation in the trial areas is satisfactory before preparation of concrete surfaces is continued. 2. Apply the sealer in two of the 100 SF trial areas to review the method of = application and verify that the treated surface is not glazing. One of the 100 SF areas is to remain untreated. If the sealer causes glazing, the Manufacturer's Representative shall provide written recommendations for solving the problem. � The Engineer, Manufacturer's Representative, and the Installer shall be in agreement that the application in the trial areas is satisfactory before further application of the sealer. � : � 3. Manufacturer shall obtain two core samples for each of the two 100 SF trial areas that were treated and the 100 SF trial area left untreated.Appropriate tests shall � be performed on concrete core samples to determine product compatibility, recommended surface preparation,application rate,and to establish the baseline for level Af chloride ions, depth of penetration, and water absorption in accordance with the Warranty requirements of this Section. � C. Testing Requirements 4 � 1. Refer to Section 01410, Testing Laboratory for testing requirements. 1.5 Submittals A. Submit for record certification that the concrete sealer is compatible with all of the products in Divisions 3, 7, and 9 to which it will come in contact. B. Submitfor review and approval Manufacturer's Spec Data Sheets of each productto be used. C. Submit for record Material Safety Data Sheets of each product, solvent, or related chemicals to be used and certification that the materials conform to local, state, and federal environmental and worker's safety laws and regulations. CONCRETE SEALERS 07180-2 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � k' FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 D. Upon request, submit for review and approval qualifications of the Manufacturer's Representative. E. Upon request,submit for record qualification statement of the Installer stating projects, size and location. F. Submit with overall project schedule the sequence of placement of sealer within the structure. The sealer installation shall be coordinated to allow required minimum concrete cure times. G. Upon request submit for record certification that the sealer delivered to the site conforms to all published data and that sealer chemical composition is the same as that tested under NCHRP 244, Concrete Sealers for Protection of Bridge Structures. H. Submit for record results of slab moisture testing completed in accordance with ASTM D 4263 Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method. I. Submit for record certification of trial area acceptance. J. Submit for record, listing of drum seal identification and drum seal caps. K. Submit for record copies of purchase orders indicating quantities of sealer. L. Submit results of core samples. M. Submit sample Warranty. 1.6 Environmental Requirements A. Manufacturer and Installer are required to confirm that all materials used in accordance with this Section conform to local,state,and federal environmental and workers'safery laws and regulations. 1. VOC content of materials shall not exceed the limits per Environmental Protection Agency National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings(40CFR59). B. The Installer is solely responsible for fume control and shall take all necessary pre- cautions against injury to personnel or adjacent building occupants during application. As a minimum, Installer shall take the following precautions: 1. Provide and maintain barricades. 2. Locate and protect building air intakes during application. 3. Follow all state,federal, and local safety regulations. 4. Follow all Manufacturers' safety requirements. CONCRETE SEALERS 07180-3 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO x t: � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 5. Dispose empty containers immediately and properly. 6. Use protective equipment. 7. Ensure work area is well vented to the exterior. 1.7 Transportation and Handling A. Deliver sealer to site in original, unopened containers, bearing the following information: 1. Name of product 2. Name of Manufacturer 3. Date of manufacture 4. Lot or batch number B. Store sealer under cover and protected from the weather. C. Replace containers showing any signs of damage with new material at no additional cost to the Owner. D. At no time shall the weight of the stored material placed on a slab area exceed 30 PSF .,or 2,000 Ibs. over 20 square inches. � 1.8 Warranty A. Provide to the Owner a"Joint and Several"Warranty by the Manufacturer and Installer •� indicating square footage and actual rate of application and indicating that the new concrete surfaces treated with the sealer will meet the following: 1. Surfaces will not absorb more than 250 ppm of soluble chloride at a depth of 1- . 1/4 to 1-3/4 inches over an established soluble chloride baseline for the duration of the Warranty. Testing to be completed in accordance with AASHTO T 260. 2. Surfaces will not absorb more than 1.0 percent water by weight over the established water absorption baseline forthe duration of the Warranty.Testing to be completed in accordance with ASTM D 6489 — Standard Test Method for Determining Water Absorption of Hardened Concrete Treated with a Water Repellant Coating. ' B. The Warranty shall be"Joint and Several"in which the Installer and Manufacturer will jointly and severally warrant and provide at no charge to the owner materials and labor needed to properly repair or replace the product and replace parking stripes within the duration of the Warranty. In the event of either party's non-performance,the full burden and responsibility for any Warranty repair shall fall upon the remaining party. C. Approximately one year prior to the end of the Warranty the concrete shall be tested by the Manufacturer against the baseline tests for level of chloride ions, depth of penetration, and water absorption. Concrete core samples shall be taken at the CONCRETE SEALERS 07180-4 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 Owner's expense at the baseline locations and forwarded to the Manufacturer for testing.At the Owner's discretion,additional cores may be forwarded to an independent testing agency for simultaneous testing. D. If the sealer fails to meet the requirements set forth in the Warranty,the material shall be reapplied at no expense to the Owner. The retreatment of surFaces shall be governed by effectiveness as determined in the nearest adjacent test site and shall not extend to other areas where sealer performance is within the specified limits. 1.9 Warranty Duration IA. The bid price shall include a five(5)year Warranty for 40 percent silanes commencing with the date of project acceptance in accordance with Section 00700, General Conditions and Section 01700, Project Closeout and Warranties. B. Although completed areas of the facility may be opened to tra�c and parking, the �I commencement of the Warranty period will not occur prior to acceptance of the entire project.A single Warranty commencement date will apply to all waterproofing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Concrete Sealer � A. The sealer shall be a water based penetrating silane chemical capable of reducing the ingress of water and chlorides.Sealer to contain fugitive dye for application verification. B. Sealer to have minimum of 40 percent solids with a VOC content meeting the require- ments of this specification. Application rate to be a maximum of 125 SF per gallon. Maximum application rate is not to be modified for actual solids content. C. 'Approved water based silane sealers are: 1. Enviroseal 40, Hydrozo, Div. of Chemrex, Inc., Shakopee, MN. 2. Iso-Flex 618-40 WB, LymTal Intemational, Inc., Orion, M1. 3. Aqua-trete BSM 40, Sivento, Inc., subsidiary of Degussa-Huls Corporation, Somerset, NJ. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.1 General A. Inspect surfaces to receive the work and report immediately in writing to the Engineer as required in the General Conditions any deficiencies in the surface which render it unsuitable for proper execution of this work. Do not proceed with work until unsatis- factory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner. Commencement of work implies acceptance of related work. CONCRETE SEALERS 07180-5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � ; � i � }. FIRST CHAIR PERM�T SET � VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 : B. Coordinate and verify that related work meets the following requirements: � 1. Concrete surfaces have been finished,cleaned and prepped,as recommended by the Manufacturer for the system to be installed. 2. Curing compounds used on concrete surfaces have been removed. ° f 3. Concrete surfaces have completed the proper curing period for the system � selected. 4. All concrete repairs are completed. � 3.2 Preparation A. Remove all oil, grease, and contaminants in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations. � t � B. Shotblast all concrete surfaces to receive sealer application. Shotblast equipment performance requirements are as follows: 1. Equipment shall be capable of traveling at a constant speed to provide a uniform profile. The speed and the size of the equipment and the size of the steel shot shall be selected to provide desired preparation without causing unnecessary damage to the concrete surface. � 2. Equipment shall vacuum up,or otherwise retain all dirt,dust,and debris from the blasting operation. 3. Equipment used during floor slab preparation cleaning shall not exceed the weight limitation of 30 PSF. . 4. Areas inaccessible to shotblaster(i.e.vertical surFaces, against walls, columns, stairways, etc.)are to be abrasive blasted to the same performance. i 5. Shotblasted surface must be clean with a profile in which a minimum 1/16 inch of the existing concrete surface is removed. Fine aggregates must be exposed, however, large aggregate must not be exposed. All laitance must be removed. Surface profife to match ICRI CSP3 in accordance with ICRI Guideline No.03732 Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers,Coatings and � Polymer Overlays. � 6. Remove debris immediately after the surface preparation. Debris includes,but is not limited to, shot, aggregate and dust. Debris shall be placed in a covered dumpster or a covered area where it will not be rebroadcast by wind or weather. D. All surfaces shall be air blown with sufficient pressure to remove excess dirt,dust and debris, and to assure that the concrete is clean prior to application of silane. z, CONCRETE SEALERS 07180-6 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � , x € FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 E. The Installer shall be responsible for repair or replacement of all materials damaged by surface preparation operations. 3.3 Installation/Application A. Locations: Level 1 vehicular driving and parking surFaces; other areas indicated. B. Do all work in strict accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions and specifications and as indicated on the Drawings. C. Do not apply sealer until the concrete has been air dried at temperatures at or above 40 degrees F.for at least 28 days after the curing period specified in Section 03300,Cast- In-Place Concrete, or as otherwise approved by Manufacturer. D. Concrete must be dry prior to application of concrete sealer. Contractor shall perform slab moisture testing in accordance with ASTM D 4263 Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method. Testing must be per- formed in at least one(1)location for every 25,000 SF of sealer.The use of heat lamps for performing tests may be required in areas not exposed to sunlight. -� E. In the event of surface wetting all concrete to be treated shall be air dried for at least 72 hours at temperatures above 50 degrees F. immediately before applying sealer. F. Ambient and concrete temperatures shall be between 40 and 100 degrees F. G. Do not apply sealer until the crack, control, construction, and cove sealants are fully cured. H. Apply concrete sealer after silicone sealants have fully cured a minimum of 14 days. � I. Use the following applicable method(s)to apply the sealer: 1. Low pressure hand sprayer 2. Spray distribution bar 3. Brush and roller J. When pressurized distribution equipment is used to apply the sealer, use flow- controlled and pressure regulated equipment. K. Surfaces to be sealed shall be divided into areas in accordance with the specified yield for the specific container size of sealer. The area is to be divided by chalk lines, keel marks, or another Engineer approved method. Sealer shall be applied by placing the material directly within the grid. CONCRETE SEALERS 07180-7 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � z FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � r VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 L. The sealer shali be applied at the numerical rate (SF per gallon) specified unless a lower numerical rate(SF per gallon), is required to meet Warranty requirements based on testing completed on core samples. 3.4 Cleanup A. Clean all surfaces subjected to sealer overspray and repair all damage caused by overspray to adjacent construction or property at no cost to the Owner. B. Remove all masking materials. END OF SECTION � t � CONCRETE SEALERS 07180-8 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 07210- BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 2. Perimeter foundation insulation. 3. Perimeter wall insulation. � 5. Concealed building insulation, includinq blanket insulation for sound attenuation 2 at rated assemblies. 8. Self supported, spray applied glass fiber insulation. 12. Vapor retarders. B. Related Sections include the following: 4. Division 7 Section "Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing " for insulation installed with waterproofing. 6. Division 7 Section " SBS-Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing " for insulation specified as�part of roofing construction. � 9. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for sound attenuation blankets at 2 non- rated assemblies. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Insulation composed of glass fibers; produced in boards and blanket with latter formed into batts(flat-cut lengths)or rolls. 1.4 SUBMITTALS B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency for insulation products. E. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire- test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 20'JO � � �authonties having �unsdiction. identify matenals with appropriate markings of applicable : testing and inspecting agency. �� 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. _'. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. ` 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. r: 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's f written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. B. Protect plastic insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. � 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to � Project site before installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. f PART2 -PRODUCTS � r 2.2 MANUFACTURERS � A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. r 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of F the manufacturers specified. 2.3 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION ; A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and density indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively: 2. Type IV, 1.60 Ib/cu.ft., unless otherwise indicated. s i � BUILDING INSULATION 07210-2 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � { FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 2.8 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke�ieveloped indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. C. Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (blankets with reflective membrane facing), Class A (membrane-faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil-scrim-kraft, foil-scrim,or foil- scrim-polyethylene vapor-retarder membrane on 1 face. D. Unless otherwise indicated, provide blankets in batt or roll form with thermal resistances indicated. 2.9 SLAG-WOOL-FIBER/ROCK-WOOL-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION � B. Unfaced, Sla�-Wool-Fiber/Rock-Wool-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Tvpe I (blankets without membrane facinq); consistinq of fibers; with maximum flame- spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectivelv; passinq ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. C. Faced, Slaq-Wool-Fiber/Rock-Wool-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Tvpe III (blankets with reflective membrane facinq), Class A(membrane-faced surface with a flame spread of 25 or less); Cateqory 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil- scrim-kraft, foil-scrim, or foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor-retarder membrane on 1 face. D. Unless otherwise indicated, provide blankets in batt or roll form with thermal resistances indicated. 2.13 SPRAYED GLASS-FIBER INSULATION A. Sprayed, Glass-Fiber Insulation: ASTM E 136; Glass fibers containing no asbestos or cellulose;Water-based adhesive. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Guardian Fiberglass, division of Guardian Building Products. b. Monoglass. c. Thermacoustic Industries Intemational Ltd. B. Performance Characteristics: Provide sprayed glass- fiber insulation with the following characteristics: PROPERTY TEST METHOD RESULTS Fire Hazard Classification ASTM E84-79: Flame Spread =0 Smoke Developed =0 Fuel Contribution =0 Non-Combustibility ASTM E-136, ISO 1182-90&CAN Non-Combustible 4-S114-78 Air Erosion ASTM E859 No Mass loss BUILDING INSULATION 07210-3 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 Smolder Resistance CGSB 51-GP-36P Passed:0.4% mean wei ht loss � Vibration Resistance T pe 1 CGSB 51 GP-11 M Passed: 0.02% mass loss Dry Densiry ASTM D-1622-83 3.0 ounds/cubic foot Thermal Conductivi ASTM C-518 K-Factor.25, R-Value 4.00/inch Noise Reduction Coefficient ASTM C-423-77 NRC= .85, 1.4" on solid backin ISO 354 NRC= .75 @ 25mm/1"` NRC= .95 50mm/2"* Fire Gas Toxici Universi of Pittsbur h Protocol Max CO2 3.5%, Max CO 0.3% Fun us&Bacterial Resistance ASTM G-21-90 No Growth 4 2.15 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm. B. Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: 2 outer layers of polyethylene film laminated to an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nylon cord or polyester scrim and weighing not less than 25 Ib/1000 sq. ft., with maximum permeance rating of 0.07 perm. 1. Available Products: a. Raven Industries Inc.; DURA-SKRIM 6WW. b. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn T-65. a C. Fire-Retardant, Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: 2 outer layers of polyethylene � film laminated to an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nonwoven grid of nylon cord � or polyester scrim and weighing not less than 22 Ib/1000 sq. ft., with maximum permeance rating of 0.1317 perm and with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of not more than 5 and 60, respectively. � 1. Available Products: a. Raven Industries Inc.; DURA-SKRIM 2FR. b. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn T-55 FR. E. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. F. Vapor-Retarder Fasteners: Pancake-head, self-tapping steel drill screws; with fender washers. G. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type I, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT related to exposure, and Use O related to vapor-barrier-related substrates. 2.16 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. s � BUILDING INSULATION 07210-4 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO F ; � � € FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions,with Installer present,for compliance with requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice, rain, and snow. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. . D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND UNDER-SLAB INSULATION A. On vertical surFaces, set insulation units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer. 1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches below exterior grade line. B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units. BUILDING INSULATION 07210-5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 : � 4 ' 3.6 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's � written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive ` r or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. E B. Seal joints between foam-plastic insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed instaflation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer. C. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder in location indicated . 1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation. D. Install mineral-fiber insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit � between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures. 6. For wood-framed construction, install mineral-fiber blankets according to � ASTM C 1320 and as follows: b. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once finish material is installed over it. J. Apply self-supported, sprayed glass-fiber insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply insulation until installation of pipes, ducts, conduits, wiring, and electrical outlets in walls is completed and windows, electrical boxes, and other items not indicated to receive insulation are masked. Where required by authorities having jurisdiction, tamp surfaces and apply adhesive overspray according to manufacturer's recommendations. a. Thickness:As required to achieve 0.95 NRC, but not less than finro inches. b. Locations: Underside of Level 2 metal floor deck at Level 1 mechanical and electrical rooms; above sectional door (confirm exact location and extent with Architect); other locations indicated. Reference reflected ceiling plans for additional information. 3.9 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation. � BUILDING INSULATION 07210-6 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 C. Before installing vapor� retarder, apply urethane sealant, double- stick tape, or other adhesive, acceptable to manufacturer and Architect, to flanges of inetal framing including runner tracks, metal studs, and framing around door and window openings. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's written instructions. Seal butt joints with vapor-retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates. D. Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor-retarder fasteners as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer. E. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal befinreen penetrating objects and vapor retarder. F. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder. 3.10 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. 3.2 INSULATION SCHEDULE A. R-21 high density batt insulation level 1, 6" metal stud framing. B. R-13 batt insulation level 1, 4" metal stud framing plus 2" continuous exterior polystyrene rigid insulation. C. R-19 batt insulation levels 2 thru 5 wood construction. D. South flat roof R-24 min rigid insulation at drains. E. North terrace with pavers ; 2" spray insulation plus 10" batt insulation. �F. Roof, tvpical: R-38 batt insulation. 2 END OF SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION 07210-7 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � � � `�r� � i � � BUILDING INSULATION 07210-8 t OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � E . � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 07260 - UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes under-slab vapor retarders and accessory items required for installation at the following locations: 1. Slabs-on-grade at main entry lobby and residential storage areas. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 3 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete". 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materiafs (ASTM) 1. ASTM E1745 Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil Or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. 2. ASTM E154 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs. 3. ASTM E96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Tran�mission of Materials. 4. ASTM E1643 Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. 5. ASTM F1249-01 Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission Rate Through Plastic Film and Sheeting Using a Modulated Infrared Sensor. 1.3 SUBMITTALS � A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical literature describing each product indicated or required for the Work; include manufacturers installation instructions. B. Samples for Verification Purposes:Submit samples of each product indicated or required for the Work: 1. 24 inch s uare sam le of each va or retarder membrane. q P P 2. 24 inch square sample of 2 pieces of vapor retarder membrane taped with the seam tape. 3. Preformed accessories or mastic that will be used for penetrations. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Provide secondary materials only as provided, or recommended, by manufacturer of primary materials. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer. B. Store materials in a clean dry area in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDERS 07260-1 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO ___ � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 C. Stack membrane on smooth ground or wood platform to eliminate warping. � D. Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage or contamination. } PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VAPOR RETARDER FOR CONCRETE SLAB-ON-GRADE CONDITIONS: A. Description: Prefabricated, flexible, lightweight material manufactured from raw or virgin _ polyethylene or polyolefin resins (post-consumer, recycled resins are not permitted); not less than 15 mils thick; ASTM E 1745, Class A, except water vapor permeance property shall not exceed 0.03 perms. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Raven Industries—"VaporBlock 15". 2. Reef Industries, Inc.—"Griffolyn 15 mil Green". 3. Stego Industries LLC—"Stego Wrap" , 15 mil. 4. Strata Systems, Inc.—"Strata- Barrier 16 Mil". 5. W. R. Meadows, Inc.—"Perminator", 15 mil. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Seaming Tape: One-sided or two-sided pressure-sensitive tape of type, material and size as � provided by membrane manufacturer,for sealing membrane joints and for sealing membrane to ± other adjacent structures. � B. Penetration Accessories: Manufacturers standard premolded products or mastic for sealing penetrations through membrane. PART 3 - EXECUTION . 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine subgrade and foundation surfaces to receive below slab- on-grade vapor retarder and conditions under which work be installed. Proceed only when ; unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as installer's acceptance of surface conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Subgrade: Ensure subgrade is smooth, level, and compacted with no sharp or protruding objects that might rip, tear or puncture membrane. 3.3 INSTALLATION ; A. Installation Quality Standards: � 1. ASTM E 1643, except do not place granular fill on top of inembrane. � 2. Manufacturers written installation instructions. 3. Approved submittals. r 4. Contract Documents. � UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDERS 07260-2 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO i ; FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 B. Membrane Instailation Requirements: Install membrane beneath concrete slabs-on�rade after subgrade has been properly prepared and prior to slab reinforcement installation. 1. Place membrane in widest width possible over subgrade with longest dimension parallel with direction of concrete pour, stretch out wrinkles to form smooth surFace, and orient with proper membrane face toward concrete. 2. Properly dry and clean mating surfaces of inembrane prior to sealing with seaming tape. 3. Overlap sides and ends of inembrane in joints not less than 6 inches and seal with seaming tape. 4. Ensure that vapor retarder membrane is continuous from edge to edge of concrete slabs- on-grade according to following: a. Place membrane on top of footings and"roll-up'onto vertical surfaces and seal with seaming tape. b. Extend membrane out from under edges of concrete slabs-on-grade to demonstrate continuity. C. Penetrations: Cut membrane carefully around penetrations and seal with either premolded accessories, or on-site membrane collar fabrications using seaming tape or mastic; if field fabricated comply with manufacturers recommended details. D. Damage: Repair rips,tears,or punctures with seaming tape, or by cutting out damaged areas and patching with new membrane, overlapping damaged area 6 inches in each direction and sealing with seaming tape. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL B. Prior to beginning installation of reinforcing, inspect membrane for rips, tears and punctures. D. Immediately prior to concrete placement work, inspect field of inembrane for rips, tears and punctures, inspect penetrations by columns and mechanical and electrical piping through membrane. E. Continuously inspect concrete placement work,watching for damage to membrane. F. Periodically inspect portions of the slab that were not placed(block-outs,voids and leave-outs) for water infiltration of the subgrade until concrete is subsequently placed. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protection During Concrete Work: Institute necessary protective measures that ensures that membrane will be without damage or deterioration during in-place fabrication of steel reinforcement and subsequent placement of concrete. 1. Do not permit street vehicles to drive over membrane once it has been placed. 2. Do not permit wood or steel stakes that would penetrate the membrane to be used. 3. At locations where portions of the slab are not placed(block-outs,voids and leave-outs), provide necessary protective measures to prevent water infiltration into the void that would contaminate the subgrade below the vapor retarder; maintain until concrete is subsequently placed. � END OF SECTION 07260 UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDERS 07260-3 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET = VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 g � � � � � UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDERS 07260-4 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 07311 -ASPHALT SHINGLES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Asphalt shingles. 2. Underlayment. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry"for wood framing. 2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications"for snow fences. 3. Division 6 Section "Sheathing"for roof sheathing. 1.2 .DEFINITION A. Roofing�Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual"for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For the following products, of sizes indicated, to verify color selected: � 1. As halt Shin le: Full size. P 9 2. Ridge Cap Shingles: Full size. 5. Self-Adhering Underlayment: 12 inches square. D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for asphalt shingles. , F. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each type of asphalt shingle required, from the ICC . G. Maintenance Data: For each type of asphalt shingle to include in maintenance manuals. H. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 -1 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE � A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain ridge and hip cap shingles from single source from single manufacturer. ; C. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide asphalt shingles and related roofing materials identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per test method below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A ; ASTM E 108 or UL 790, for application and roof slopes indicated. ° �; � 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING �: A. Store roofing materials in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight location according to asphalt : shingle manufacturer's written instructions. Store underlayment rolls on end on pallets or � other raised surfaces. Do not double stack rolls. 1. Handle, store, and place roofing materials in a manner to avoid significant or �� permanent damage to roof deck or structural supporting members. � ; B. Protect unused underlayment from weather, sunlight, and moisture when left overnight or � when roofing work is not in progress. ; 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS � ' 5 A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install asphalt shingles until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1. Install self-adhering sheet underlayment within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by manufacturer. ; } 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace asphalt shingles that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. � 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Manufacturing defects. � b. Structural failures including failure of asphalt shingles to self-seal after a � reasonable time. ; E � ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 -2 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � r FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2. Material Warranty Period: 40 years from date of Substantial Completion, prorated, with first seven years nonprorated. 3. Wind-Speed Warranty Period: Asphalt shingles will resist blow-off or damage caused by wind speeds up to 90 mph for five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED ASPHALT SHINGLES A. Laminated-Strip Asphalt Shingles: ASTM D 3462, laminated, multi-ply overlay construction, glass-fiber reinforced, mineral-granule surfaced, and self-sealing. 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Elk Corp.; Prestique I High Definition or comparable product by one of the following: b. CertainTeed Corporation. d. GAF Materials Corporation. g. Owens Corning. i. TAMKO Roofing Products, Inc. 6. Color and Blends: As indicated by manufacturer's designations . 5. Algae Resistance: Granules treated to resist algae discoloration. 2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS C. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, Polyethylene Faced: ASTM D 1970, minimum of 40- mil- thick, slip-resisting, polyethylene-film-reinforced top surface laminated to SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release paper backing; cold applied. 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Elk Corp; Shieldgard, or comparable product by one of the following: a. Carlisle Coatings�Waterproofing, Inc. b. Grace, W. R. &Co. -Conn. c. Henry Company. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II, asbestos free. B. Roofing Nails: ASTM F 1667; aluminum, stainless-steel, copper, or hot-dip galvanized- steel wire shingle nails, minimum 0.120-inch- diameter, barbed shank, sharp-pointed, with a minimum 3/8-inch- diameter flat head and of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4 inch into solid wood decking or extend at least 1/8 inch through OSB or plywood sheathing. 1. Where nails are in contact with metal flashing, use nails made from same metal as flashing. � ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 -3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � E FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � 2.5 METAL FLASHING AND TRIM � A. General: Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's � "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item. �: PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the ;: Work. 1. Examine roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing and blocking or metal clips and that installation is within flatness tolerances. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely anchored; and that provision has been made for flashings and penetrations through asphalt shingles. t B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance � of the Work. � C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. < 3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with underlayment manufacturer's written installation instructions : applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply. D. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install, wrinkle free, on roof deck. Comply with low- ; temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if applicable. Install over entire roof deck, in compliance with IBC 1507.2, lapped in direction to shed water. Lap sides not less than 3-1/2 inches. Lap ends not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within seven days. 1. Prime surfaces to receive self-adhering sheet underlayment as recommended by manufacturer. E. Provide an additional layer of self-adhering sheet underlayment at the following locations: ; 1. Eaves: Extend from edges of eaves 24 inches beyond interior face of exterior wall. 2. Rakes: Extend from edges of rake 24 inches beyond interior face of exterior wall. : 3. Valleys: Extend from lowest to highest point 18 inches on each side. ' 4. Hips: Extend 18 inches on each side. 5. Ridges: Extend 36 inches on each side. 6. Sidewalls: Extend beyond sidewall � 24 inches , and return vertically against � € sidewall not less than 4 inches . ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 -4 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO 4 FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 7. Dormers, Chimneys, Skylights, and Other Roof-Penetrating Elements: Extend beyond penetrating element � 24 inches , and retum vertically against penetrating element not less than 4 inches . 8. Roof Slope Transitions: Extend 18 inches on each roof slope. 3.3 METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install metal flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 1. Install metal flashings according to recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual" and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." 3.4 ASPHALT SHINGLE INSTALLATION A. General: Install asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions, recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual," and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." B. Install starter strip along lowest roof edge, consisting of an asphalt shingle strip with self- sealing strip face up at roof edge. .. 1. Extend asphalt shingles 1/2 to 3/4 inch over fasciae at eaves and rakes. 2. Install starter strip along rake edge. D. Install first and remaining courses of asphalt shingles stair-stepping diagonally across roof deck with manufacturer's recommended offset pattem at succeeding courses, maintaining uniform exposure. F. Fasten asphalt shingle strips with a minimum of six roofing nails located according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Where roof slope is less than 4:12, seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots. 3. When ambient temperature during installation is below 50 deg F , seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots. . , �ee€w�-se�e#� I. Open Vallevs: Cut and fit asphalt shinqles at open valleys, trimminQ upper concealed corners of shinqle strips. Maintain uniform width of exposed open valley from hiahest to lowest point. ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 -5 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO - � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 1. Set vallev edqe of asphalt shinqles in a 3-inch- wide bed of asphalt roofing � { cement. 2. Do not nail asphalt shinqles to metal open-vallev flashinqs. K. Ridge and Hip Cap Shingles: Maintain same exposure of cap shingles as roofing shingle exposure. Lap cap shingles at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing winds. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing. 1. Fasten ridge cap asphalt shingles to cover ridge vent without obstructing airflow. � � END OF SECTION 07371 ; � fl � 3 � f r . ; f- F 4 � ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 -6 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO �. � ! f ' S FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 07411 -METAL ROOF PANELS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 3. Standing-seam metal roof panels. � 4. Snow quards. 2 B. Related Sections: 3. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for field-formed fasciae, flashings, roof drainage systems, and other sheet metal work not part of inetal roof panel assemblies. 5. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"for field-applied sealants not otherwise specified in this Section. 6. Division 16 Sections for heat-trace wiring for gutters and downspouts. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Metal Roof Panel Assembly: Metal roof panels, attachment system components, miscellaneous metal framing, thermal insulation, underlavments, snow quards, � flashinqs, and accessories necessary for a complete weathertight roofing system. 1.3 P�ERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Metal roof panels shall comply with perFormance requirements without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. �B. Performance Requirements criteria does not areclude compliance with warrantv 2 requirements, includinq weathertiqhtness warrantv. C. Delegated Design: Design metal roof panel assembly, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. D. Air Infiltration: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of roof area when tested according to ASTM E 1680 at the following test-pressure difference: 1. Test-Pressure Difference(Roof pitch of 7:12 or less): Negative 1.57 Ibf/sq. ft. . 3. Positive Preload Test-Pressure Difference: Greater than or equal to 15.0 Ibf/sq. ft. and the greater of 75 percent of building live load or 50 percent of building design positive wind-pressure difference . 4. Negative Preload Test-Pressure Difference: 50 percent of design wind-uplift-pressure difference . METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 - 1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO } FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � E. Water Penetration: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 1646 at the � following test-pressure difference: 1. Test-Pressure Difference (Roof pitch of 7:12 or less): 2.86 Ibf/sq.ft. . 3. Positive Preload Test-Pressure Difference: Greater than or equal to 15.0 Ibf/sq. ft. and the greater of 75 percent of building live load or 50 percent of building design positive wind-pressure difference . 4. Negative Preload Test-Pressure Difference: 50 percent of design wind-uplift-pressure difference . ` � F. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for ' wind-uplift-resistance class indicated. i 1. Uplift Rating: UL 90. 2. Hail Resistance: SH . � H. Structural Performance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under = conditions indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592: 1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the following minimum design wind � � pressures = r � � b. Uniform pressure as indicated on Drawings. 2. Snow Loads: Uniform pressure as indicated on Drawings . � a. Snow Guards: Provide metal roof panel assemblies capable of withstanding t snow guard graviry and mechanical forces without cracking, deformation, or other failure. I. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. ' 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F , material surfaces. ` � 1.4 SUBMITTALS B. Deliver submittals simultaneously. � C. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type ; of roof panel and accessory. Include product data for snow auards and accessories, ;; underlavments, and slip sheets. D. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of inetal roof panels; details of � edge conditions, side-seam and endlap joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish befinreen factory- and field-assembled work. � METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 -2 i OZ Architecture Boulder,CO s � t; FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 1. Accessories: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches: a. Flashing and trim. b. Gutters. c. Downspouts. e. Snow guards. E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1. Metal Roof Panels: 12 inches long by actual panel width. Include fasteners, clips, closures, and other metal roof panel accessories. 2. Trim and Closures: 12 inches long. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories. 3. Accessories: 12-inch- long Samples for each type of accessory. F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal roof panel assembly indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. Incorporate additional reauirements imposed bv snow quard retention svstem loads on panels, 2 panel clips, and other attachments. � 1. Snow Retention System Calculations: Include calculation of number and location of snow guards based on snow load, roof slope, panel length and finish, and seam type and spacing. G. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, on which the following are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 1. Roof panels and attachments. 3. Roof-mounted items, which �may inctude any or all of the following: roof hatches, • equipment supports, pipe supports and penetrations, lighting fixtures, snow guards, and items mounted on roof curbs. H. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that roof panels comply with performance requirements specified in "Performance Requirements"Article. 1. Submit evidence of ineeting performance requirements. I. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer. K. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a � qualified testing agency, for each product, includinQ snow quards and accessories, 2 underlavments, and slip sheets. M. Maintenance Data: For metal roof panels to include in maintenance manuals. N. Warranties: Samples of special warranties. METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 -3 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � � � r �' FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET ; VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 t 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE � � A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. � _ C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of inetal roof panels from single source from single r manufacturer. � � 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING i A. Deliver components, sheets, metal roof panels, and other manufactured items so as not to € be damaged or deformed. Package metal roof panels for protection during transportation � and handling. £ � B. Unload, store, and erect metal roof panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, finristing, and surface damage. C. Stack metal roof panels on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal roof panels to ensure dryness. Do not store metal roof panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface k damage. E D. Protect strippable protective covering on metal roof panels from exposure to sunlight and � high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of inetal roof panel installation. f 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS � 3 A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit metal roof panel work to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. ` B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with metal roof panels by field measurements before fabrication. 1.8 COORDINATION � A. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided. , B. Coordinate metal roof panels with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of decks, parapets, walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. � 1.9 WARRANTY E A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace metal roof panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. F � 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: � : � METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 -4 ` OZ Architecture Boulder, CO E s l i FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. b. Deterioration of inetals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. c. Failure to withstand snow guard gravity and mechanical forces, including bending, cracking, or deformation. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Warranry on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal roof panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranry period. 1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. D. Special Weathertightness Warranty for Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace standing-seam metal roof � panel assemblies that, throuqh failure of materials or workmanship, fail to remain weathertight, including leaks, within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. E. For warranty purposes, include snow guards as part of inetal roof panel assemblies. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.2 PANEL MATERIALS A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; structural quality. 2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40; structural quality. 3. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. 4. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: a. 2-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'written instructions. 5. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light- colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil. METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 -5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO «. �' Y. FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET x VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � � _ B. Panel Sealants: Anv or all of the followina, as standard with manufacturer: � ' � �2 1. Sealant Ta e: Pressure-sensitive, 100 ` p percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. 2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and ` use classifications required to seal joints in metal roof panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal roof panel manufacturer. 3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311. 2.3 FIELD-INSTALLED THERMAL INSULATION A. Refer to Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." 2.4 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS f A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: 30 to 40 mils thick minimum, consisting of slip- � resisting, polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by ; underlayment manufacturer. 1. Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 deg�F; ASTM D 1970. 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F;ASTM D 1970. � Basis-of-Desiqn Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, rovide � Grace Construction Products; a unit of Grace.W. R. 8 Co.: Ultra, or comparable ,� A: � product acceqtable to Architect. , , a. .; . . ; , . . .; . C. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's recommended slip sheet, of type required for application. �D. Transition Beddinq Material: Grace Construction Products: a unit of Grace. W. R. 8� Co.; Liauid Membrane. 2.7 MISCEL�ANEOUS MATERIALS A. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of inetal roof panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM, PVC, or neoprene sealing washers. B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. � METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 -6 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2.9 STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS A. General: Provide factory-formed metal roof panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting raised side edges of adjacent panels with joint type indicated and mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips in side laps. Include clips, cleats, pressure plates, and accessories required for weathertight installation. 1. Steel Panel Systems: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with ASTM E 1514. C. Vertical-Rib, Seamed-Joint, Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels : Formed with vertical ribs at panel edges and flat pan befinreen ribs; designed for sequential installation by mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels and engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels, and mechanically seaming panels together. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Englert, Inc.; Series 1300 Panel System, or comparable product by one of the following: a. AEP-Span. g. Butler Manufacturing; a BlueScope Steel company. i. Copper Sales, Inc. t. Metecno-Morin; Division of Metecno Inc. ' �� u. Petersen Aluminum Corporation. � 2. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized)steel sheet, 0.028-inch nominal thickness. a. Exterior Finish: 2-coat fluoropolymer . b. Color: Charcoal . 3. Material: Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, 0.028-inch nominal thickness. a. Exterior Finish: 2-coat fluoropolymer . b. Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations . 4. Clips: Floating to accommodate thermal movement. a. Material: minimum 0.0516-inch- nominal thickness, zinc-coated (galvanized)or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet. 5. Joint Type: Double folded (180°) . 6. Panel Coverage: 16 inches . 7. Panel Height: 1.5 inches . 2.10 ACCESSORIES A. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components approved by roof panel manufacturer and as required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, comer units, ridge closures, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of inetal roof panels unless otherwise indicated. METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 -7 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal � roof panels. ` 2. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam '' or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- thick, flexible closure strips; ` cut or premolded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips where £ indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. 3. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. F B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from same material and thickness as roof panels, prepainted � with coil coating. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to � provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, � corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with � same finish system as adjacent metal roof panels. C. Gutters: Formed from same material as roof panels. Match profile of gable trim, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long sections, of size and metal thickness indicated, or if not indicated, according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Furnish gutter supports spaced a maximum of 36 inches o.c., fabricated from same metal as gutters. Provide wire ball strainers of compatible metal at outlets. Finish gutters to match roof fascia and rake trim. D. Downspouts: Formed from same material as roof panels. Fabricate round downspouts in 10-foot- long sections, complete with formed elbows and offsets, of size and metal thickness indicated, or if not indicated, according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal � Manual". Finish downspouts to match gutters. � 2.11 SNOW GUARDS A. Snow Guards: Prefabricated, noncorrosive units designed to be installed without penetrating metal roof panels, and complete with predrilled holes, clamps, or hooks for anchoring. 2. Seam-Mounted, Bar-Type Snow Guards: Aluminum rods or bars held in place by stainless-steel clamps attached to vertical ribs of standing-seam metal roof panels. Include manufacturer's standard two- bar ice flaas. - � a. Powder-Coat Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard 2-coat, baked�n finish, suitable for use indicated, consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil for topcoat; color to match metal roof � panels. d. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the ` following : 1) Alpine SnowGuards, Div. of Vermont Slate & Copper Services, Inc.; #4000 Pipe-Style Clamping Snow Guard. �2 6) TRA-MAGE, Inc.; G22Z Series Clamp-On Snow Guard. ' � METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 -8 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2.12 FABRICATION A. Fabricate and finish metal roof panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes and as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel. D. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. 1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 2. End Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed,form seams, and solder. 3. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. 4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view. 5. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of size and metal thickness recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or by metal roof panel manufacturer for application, but not less than thickness of inetal being secured. 2.13 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal roof panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. C. Examine solid roof decking or sheathing to verify that joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer. METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 -9 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 D. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal roof panels to verify � actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of inetal roof panels before metal r roof panel installation. E. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. _ F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation, including removing projections ' ; capable of interfering with insulation attachment. 3.3 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with � temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply at locations indicated below , wrinkle free, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches befinreen courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3- 1/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover unde�layment within 14 days. 1. Apply finro layers over entire roof surFace. 9. Transition Beddinq Material: AppIY below bottom plv of underlavment at � horizontal-to-vertical transitions and similar irrectularities. Complv with � manufacturer's recommendations. r C. Apply slip sheet over underlayment before installing metal roof panels where recommended by manufacturer. D. Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." � 3.4 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL ` A. Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge unless otherwise indicated or restricted by shipping limitations. ; B. Thermal Movement. Rigidly fasten metal roof panels to structure at location(s) recommended by manufacturer to allow panel to move freely for thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels for fasteners. 1. Point(s)of Fixity: As recommended by manufacturer. �2 a. Coordinate with locations of snow quards. 2. Avoid attaching accessories through roof panels in a manner that will inhibit thermal movement. C. Install metal roof panels as follows: � METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 - 10 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2. Field cutting of inetal paneis by torch is not permitted. 4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 5. Provide metal closures at rake edges and each side of ridge caps. 6. Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and perimeter of all openings. 7. Install ridge caps as metal roof panel work proceeds. 9. Install metal flashing to allow moisture to run over and off metal roof panels. D. Fasteners: 1. Steel Roof Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior and galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior. E. Anchor Clips: Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the Work securely in place, using manufacturer's approved fasteners according to manufacturers' written instructions. F. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. 1. Coat back side of roof panels with bituminous coating where roof panels will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. �� G. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets,joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of inetal roof panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. 1. Seal metal roof panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Seal side joints where recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.5 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION B. Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. 1. Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners. 2. Install pressure plates at locations indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. 4. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved, motorized seamer tool so clip, metal roof panel, and factory-applied sealant are completely engaged. � METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 - 11 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 3.6 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION � A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, seatants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps,joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges fofded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance. 2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of comer or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). C. Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered or lapped and seated joints. Attach gutters � to eave with gutter hangers spaced not more than 36 inches o.c. using manufacturer's standard fasteners. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. D. Downspouts: Join sections with telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1 inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. in between. 1. Provide etbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building. F. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and metal roof panels. Fasten and seal to metal roof panels as recommended by manufacturer. 3.7 SNOW GUARD INSTALLATION A. Bar-Type Snow Guards: Attach bar supports to vertical ribs of standing-seam metal roof panels with clamps or set screws. Do not use fasteners that will penetrate metal roof panels. 1. Provide snow guards at locations indicated on Drawings. � METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 -12 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO ; FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect metal roof panel installation, including accessories. Report results in writing. B. Remove and replace applications of inetal roof panels where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. C. Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.10 CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal roof panels are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of inetal roof panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. B. Replace metal roof panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 07411 .. � � METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 -13 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � P: ; � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 f $ � � 1 f i t [ C � e !. � € S � i f 3 (: � METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 - 14 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 07460-SIDING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fiber-cement siding. 2. Fiber-cement soffit. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry"for wood furring, grounds, nailers, and blocking. 2. Division 6 Section"Sheathing"for wall sheathing and weather-resistive barriers. 3. Division 6 Section"Exterior Finish Carpentry"for wood exterior trim. 1.2 SUBMITfALS B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. 2. 24-inch- wide-by-36-inch- high Sample panel of siding assembled on plywood backing. 3. 12-inch- long-by-actual-width Sample of soffit. 4. 12-inch- long-by-actual-width Samples of trim and accessories. E. Product Certificates: For each type of siding and soffit,from manufacturer. F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for fiber-cement siding. G. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each type of siding required, from the ICC . H. Maintenance Data: For each type of siding and soffit and related accessories to include in maintenance manuals. I. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Labeling: Provide fiber-cement siding that is tested and labeled according to ASTM C 1186 by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type, color, texture, and pattern of siding and soffit, including related accessories, from single source from single manufacturer. SIDING 07460-1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � i ; FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � , VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING � ' A. Store materials in a dry,well-ventilated, weathertight place. ` � � 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation with flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure proper � sequencing. i t = 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace siding = and soffit that fail(s)in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. P' 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: < � a. Structural failures including cracking, deforming. 3. Warranty Period, from date of Substantial Completion: a. Materials: 50 years. b. ��Installation: 2 years. � PART2-PRODUCTS � � 2.3 MANUFACTURERS '' x A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of James Hardie or comparable products by one of the following: 1. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Nichiha Fiber Cement. G 2.4 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING A. General: ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II, fiber-cement board, noncombustible when " tested according to ASTM E 136; with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84. � � 2. Horizontal Pattem: HardiePlank"Select CedarmilP', 6- inch exposure, smooth . £ 3. Vertical Pattern: HardiePanel "Cedarmill". 7. Factory Priming: Manufacturer's standard acrylic primer. ; � � SIDING 07460-2 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � g � �' . � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 2.7 FIBER-CEMENT SOFFIT A. General: ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade Ii, fiber-cement board, noncombustible when tested according to ASTM E 136; with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84. 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide James Hardie; HardiePanel, "Cedarmill"or comparable product by one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corp. C. Ventilation: Provide unperforated soffit unless otherwise indicated. D. Factory Priming: Manufacturer's standard acrylic primer. 2.9 ACCESSORIES A. Siding Accessories, General: Provide starter strips, edge trim, outside and inside corner caps, battens, and other items as recommended by siding manufacturer for building configuration. 1. Provide accessories matching color and texture of adjacent siding unless otherwise indicated. D. Decorative Accessories: Provide the following fiber-cement decorative accessories as indicated: 2. Door and window casings . 8. Fasciae. 9. Moldings and trim. E. Colors for Decorative Accessories: As indicated by manufacturer's designations . F. Concealed Flashings and Transitions: Provide as indicated or required at windows, doors, and other openings in siding to maintain weathertight assembly. G. Exposed Flashing: Provide prepainted metallic- coated steel sheet flashing complying with Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim"where indicated. 1. Finish for Prepainted Metallic- Coated Steel Sheet Flashing: High-performance organic finish, color as indicated by manufacturer's designations . H. Fasteners: 1. For fastening to wood, use siding nails of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 1 inch into substrate. 4. For fastening fiber cement, use stainless-steel fasteners. I. Metal Outside Corner Trim: Fry Reglet; "FCP-Outside Comer"; Colors as selected from manufacturer's full range. SIDING 07460-3 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO : g FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 �J. Metai Horizontal Trim: Frv Reqlet; "FCP-Z Flashina": Colors as selected from � manufacturer's full ranQe. PART 3 - EXECUTION i 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other � conditions affecting performance of siding and soffit and related accessories. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION { A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. � 3.3 INSTALLATION {: A. General: Comply with siding and soffit manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply. � 1. Do not install damaged components. C. Install fiber-cement siding and soffit and related accessories. � 1. Install fasteners no more than 24 inches o.c. �: E. Install joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and to produce a weathertight installation. � ' x 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING � A. Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective materials and replace with new materials complying with specified requirements. B. Clean finished surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean condition during construction. END OF SECTION 07460 € � SIDING 07460-4 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO f FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 07552-STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Styrene-butadiene-styrene (SBS) modified bituminous membrane roofing, cold- adhered. 4. Roof insulation. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for insulation beneath the roof deck. 3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"for joint sealants,joint fillers, and joint preparation. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual"for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Installed membrane roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufac#ure, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Membrane roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight. B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by membrane roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience. C. Roofing System Design: Provide membrane roofing system that is identical to systems that have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift pressure calculated according to ASCE/SEI 7 for project location. 1.4 SUBMITTALS B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. C. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Base flashings and membrane terminations. STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE(SBS)MODIFIED BITUMINOUS 07552- 1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � E FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � 2. Ta ered insulation, includin slo es. � P 9 p � 3. Crickets, saddles, and tapered edge strips, including slopes. 4. Insulation fastening pattems for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations. D. Samples for Verification: For the following products: � 1. Sheet roofing materials, including base sheet, flashing backer sheet, membrane cap �` sheet, and flashing sheet, of color specified. =� � 2. Roof insulation. 4. Roof pavers. 6. Six insulation fasteners of each type, length, and finish. E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and Manufacturer. , � � F. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system ; complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements"Article. ` 1. Submit evidence of complying with performance requirements. G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of inembrane roofing system. � H. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of inembrane roofing system, from the ICC- ES . I. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals. � F J. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. � 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is UL listed for membrane roofing system identical to that used for this Project. t B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by membrane roofing syste'm manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible ` to receive manufacturer's special warranty. C. Source Limitations: Obtain components including insulation,flashings, adhesives, sealants, counterflashings, fasteners, fastener plates, fastener strips, hard rubber or metal edging, ° metal termination bars, sheet metal copings and edge metal, and flashings at penetrations � for membrane roofing system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or approved by membrane roofing manufacturer. D. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108, Class A ; for application and roof slopes indicated, as determined by testing identical membrane roofing materials by a qualified testing agency. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing ; agency. � F STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE(SBS)MODIFIED BITUMINOUS � 07552-2 € OZ Architecture Boulder, CO �: FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 E. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide fire-resistance-rated roof assemblies identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. G. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Directed by General Contractor or Construction Manager prior to beginning of roofing work. Conduct conference at Project site . H. Discussion shall include but not necessarily be limited to the following: 1. Contract Document requirements. 2. Roof plan. 3. Roofing and flashing details. 4. Scupper elevations. 5. Roofing manufacturer's specifications and details. 6. UL requirements. 7. Insulation manufacturer's recommendations. 9. Available on-site storage. 10. Roof protection from damage by other trades. I. Attendance is required for: 1. General Contractor or Construction Manager. 3. Roofing contractor's superintendent. 4. Roofing system manufacturer's representative. 5. Sheet metal contractor performing metal flashing work. 8. Plumbing contractor. 9. Architect. 10. Owner. 11. Other representatives directly concerned with performance of the Work, including (where applicable) Owner's insurers, testing agencies and goveming authorities. J. Minimum finro weeks prior to conference forward pertinent information to General Contractor or Construction Manager for review. � 1. Installation drawings. 2. Manufacturers' product data. 3. Samples of proposed materials. 4. Sample warranties. 5. Other information deemed pertinent for sound and secure application. K. Conference shall review specifications, details, application requirements and preliminary work. L. Objectives of Preinstallation Conference to include: 1. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Tour representative areas of roofing substrates(decks); inspect and discuss condition of substrates, roof drains, curbs, penetrations and other preparatory work performed by others. 3. Review structural loading limitations of decks during and after roofing and inspect decks for loss of flatness and for required attachment. STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE(SBS)MODIFIED BITUMINOUS 07552-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 4. Review roofing system requirements (drawings, specifications and other contract � documents). 5. Review warranty requirements. Discuss inter- related responsibilities. Identify and resolve warranty conflicts, overlapping or competing requirements, or any other issues that may compromise issuance of warranties, or warranty claims. 6. Review required submittals both completed and yet to be completed. 7. Review and finalize construction schedule related to roofing work and verify availability of materials, installer's personnel, equipment and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 8. Review required inspection, testing, certifying and material usage accounting procedures. 9. Discuss sequencing and scheduling. 10. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures for coping with unfavorable conditions, including possibility of temporary roofing. 11. Review notification procedures for weather or non-working days. 12. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system. 13. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 14. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation. 15. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation. 16. Record discussion of conference including decisions and agreements (or �� disagreements) reached. a. If substantial disagreements exist at conclusion of conference, determine how � disagreements will be resolved and set date for reconvening conference. M. Furnish copy of record to each party who may be affected by roofing work, (whether or not in attendance)and to Owner and Architect. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight. 1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturers written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent ` deflection of deck. � STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE(SBS)MODIFIED BITUMINOUS 07552-4 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.8 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Manufacturer's Special Roofing Warranty: 1. Submit a finrenty-year weather-tightness warranty signed by the manufacturer. a. Warranty to include materials and installation. b. Membrane manufacturer will in a timely manner, upon Owner's written request and in reference to a specific question, concem or problem, conduct an inspection of the roofing assembly at any time during the life of the warranty. 2. Warrant the entire roofing system, including but.not necessarily limited to: membrane, flashings, adhesives, sealants, counterflashings, insulation, fasteners, fastener plates, fastener strips, hard rubber or metal edging, metal termination bars, sheet metal copings and edge metal, and flashings at penetrations. 3. Scope of coverage: a. Repair any leak in the roofing system caused by the ordinary wear and tear of the elements, manufacturing defects, and workmanship used to install these materials. 4. Limit of liability: No Dollar Limitation. 5. Edge metal, copings, and flashings at penetrations shall be fumished by the roofing system manufacturer and covered by manufacturer's warranty. a. Submit a 20-year warranty on 70% PVDF fluoropolymer coatings on coil- coated edge metal, copings, and other pre-painted sheet metal components. C. Installer's Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form acceptable to Owner and Manufacturer, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, including all components of inembrane roofing system such as roofing membrane, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, roof pavers, and walkway products, for the following warranty period: 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. D. Manufacturer's Special Insulation Warranty: Manufacturer's standard or customized form, acceptable to Owner, in which manufacturer agrees to replace roof insulation that fails to maintain at least 80 percent of published aged R-value within specified warranty period. STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE(SBS)MODIFIED BITUMINOUS 07552-5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 1. Warranty Period: Twenty years from date of Final Acceptance of the roofing system. � 1.9 MANUFACTURER'S ONSITE RESPONSIBILITIES A. When roofing is in progress, the roofing system manufacturer will provide: 1. Written reports to the Architect indicating the progress and quality of the work as observed. 2. Inspections at appropriate intervals that will insure proper roofing system installation, but not less than one visit during each week roofing installations occur. 3. Reports to the Architect in writing documenting any failure or refusal of the Contractor to correct unacceptable practices called to the Contractor's attention. 4. After completion, confirmation in writing that manufacturer has observed no application procedures in conflict with the specifications or with manufacturer's installation requirements. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.2 SBS-MODIFIED ASPHALT-SHEET MATERIALS A. SBS-Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing: ; 1. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: SBS-Modified Bituminous Membrane roofing systems are based on Siplast, Inc.; Paradiene 20HT/ 30FR. Subject to compliance with � requirements, provide SBS-Modified Bituminous Membrane roofing systems by the named manufacturer or one of the following: g. GAF Materials Corporation. . t. TAMKO Building Products, Inc. B. Roofing Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 6163, Grade S, Type I, SBS-modified asphalt sheet (reinforced with glass fibers) ; smooth surfaced; suitable for application method specified. D. Granule-Surface Roofing Membrane Cap Sheet: ASTM D 6163, Grade G, Type I, SBS- modified asphalt sheet (reinforced with glass fibers) ; granular surfaced; suitable for application method specified, and as follows: 1. Granule Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors . 2.5 BASE FLASHING SHEET MATERIALS � C. Backer Sheet: ASTM D 6163, Grade S, Type I, SBS-modified asphalt sheet (reinforced with glass fibers) ; smooth surfaced; suitable for application method specified. 3 D. Granule-Surfaced Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 6163, Grade G, Type I, SBS-modified asphalt sheet (reinforced with glass fibers) ; granular surfaced; suitable for application method specified, and as follows: STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE(SBS)MODIFIED BITUMINOUS � 07552-6 ` OZ Architecture Boulder, CO z � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 1. Granule Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors . 2.6 AUXILIARY ROOFING MEMBRANE MATERIALS I A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with roofing membrane. � 1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having � jurisdiction. E. Cold-Applied Adhesive: Roofing system manufacturer's standard asphalt-based, one- or finro-part, asbestos-free, cold-applied adhesive specially formulated for compatibiliry and use with roofing membrane and base flashings. 1. Acceptable Product: Siplast, Inc.; PA-311. G. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene, plain or modified bitumen; nonhardening, nonmigrating, nonskinning, and nondrying. H. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roofing membrane components to substrate; tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. .. I. Metal Flashing Sheet: As specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." J. Roofing Granules: Ceramic-coated roofing granules, No. 11 screen size with 100 percent passing No. 8 sieve and 98 percent of mass retained on No.40 sieve, color to match roofing membrane. . l. Miscellaneou�Accessories: Provide those recommended by roofing system manufacturer. �a . , . , 2.9 ROOF INSULATION A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by roofing manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of thicknesses indicated. E. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2 , felt or glass- fiber mat facer on both major surfaces. STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE SBS MODIFIED BITUMINOUS � ) 07552-7 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO F FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET _ z VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � J. Tapered Insulation: In addition to flat boards, provide factory-tapered insulation boards � fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches unless otherwise indicated. K. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes ° t where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. i 2.10 INSULATION ACCESSORIES � A. General: Fumish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatibility with membrane roofing. � . . ; � � . 2 � E. Full-Spread Applied Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended spray- applied, low-rise, two-component urethane adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer. ` 1. Acceptable Product: Siplast, Inc.; Para-Stik. H. Wood Cant Strips: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry ." M. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/4 inch thick, factory primed. 1. Products: Sub'ect to com liance with re uirements, rovide the followin : � � 1 P 4 P 9 a. Georgia-Pacific Corporation; Dens Deck Prime . `' 2.11 ROOF PAVERS' B. Rubber Roof Pavers: Interlocking, lighfinreight rubber units, 24 by 24 by 2-1/4 inches, 6 Ib/sq. ft.; with grooved back for four-way drainage, beveled and doweled; and as follows: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following : a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated; Interlocking Rubber Paver. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system: 1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and curbs are set and braced and that roof drain bodies are securely clamped in place. STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE(SBS)MODIFIED BITUMINOUS � 07552-8 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO x FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 2. Verify that wood cants, blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation. 3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with requirements in Division 5 Section "Steel Deck." 4. Verifv that minimum concrete drvinq period recommended bv roofinq svstem manutacturer has passed. �2 5. Verifv that concrete substrate is visiblv drv and free of moisture. Test for capillarv moisture bv plastic sheet method accordinq to ASTM D 4263. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections. B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast. �4 CI IQCTCATC Q/lA�ll IAICTAI 1 AT1�11�1 cr��v�• � � � �eF > > . 3.5 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation. D. Cant Strips: Install and secure 45-degree insulation cant strips at junctures of roofing membrane system with vertical surfaces or angle changes more than 45 degrees. E. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. F. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends befinreen boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation. 1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations. G. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2.7 inches or more, install two or more layers with joints of each STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS)MODIFIED BITUMINOUS 07552-9 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each � direction. H. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surFace is flush and does not restrict flow of water. 1. Install tapered edge strips at perimeter edges of roof that do not terminate at vertical surfaces. J. Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows: 4. Set each layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place. M. Install cover boards over insulation. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Fasten cover boards to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. 3.6 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION, GENERAL B. Install roofing membrane system according to roofing system manufacturer's written 'instructions and applicable recommendations in ARMA/NRCA's "Qualiry Control Guidelines for the Application of Polymer Modified Bitumen Roofing"and as follows: 1. Deck Type: I (insulated) . ,,� 2. Adhering Method: L(cold-applied adhesive). 5. Number of SBS-Modified Asphalt Sheets: Two. 6. Surfacing Type: M (mineral-granule-surFaced cap sheet) . C. Start installation of roofing membrane in presence of roofing system manufacturer's � technical personnel. E. Cooperate with testing agencies engaged or required to perform services for installing roofing system. F. Coordinate installation of roofing system so insulation and other components of the roofing membrane system not permanently exposed are not subjected to precipitation or left uncovered at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. 1. At end of each day's work, provide tie-offs to cover exposed roofing membrane sheets and insulation with a course of coated felt set in roofing cement or hot roofing asphalt, with joints and edges sealed. ' 2. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system. 3. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. I. Substrate-Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofing asphalt and adhesives from penetrating substrate joints, entering building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building construction. $ STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE(SBS MODIFIED BITUMINOUS � ) 07552- 10 " OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 3.9 SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install modified bituminous roofing membrane sheet and cap sheet according to roofing manufacturer's written instructions, starting at low point of roofing system. Extend roofing membrane sheets over and terminate beyond cants, installing as follows: 2. Adhere to substrate in cold-applied adhesive applied at aeneral rates of 1-1/2 to 2- 1/2 aal/sq (base plv) and 1-1/2 to 2 qal/sa (inter pliesl, but in all cases as required bv manufacturer for compliance with proiect reauirements. 4. Unroll roofing membrane sheets and allow them to relax for minimum time period required by manufacturer. B. Laps: Accurately align roofing membrane sheets, without stretching, and maintain uniform �side and end laps. Stagger end laps a minimum of three feet. Completely bond and seal laps, leaving no voids. 1. Repair tears and voids in laps and lapped seams not completely sealed. C. Install roofing membrane sheets so side and end laps shed water. D. Do not walk on installed roofinq sheets before adhesive takes initial set. 3.10 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION A. Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloped and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and at penetrations through roof; secure to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions, and as follows: 5. Flashing Sheet Application: Adhere flashing sheet to substrate in cold-applied adhesive at rate required by roofing system manufacturer. B. Unless otherwise indicated, extend base flashing up walls or parapets a minimum of 8 inches above roofing membrane and 4 inches onto field of roofing membrane. C. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing. D. Install roofing membrane cap-sheet stripping where metal flanges and edgings are set on membrane roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 3.11 ROOF PAVER INSTALLATION A. Install rubber roof pavers according to manufacturer's written instructions, in locations indicated. 1. Install perimeter paver edge securement where indicated or recommended by manufacturer. STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE(SBS)MODIFIED BITUMINOUS 07552- 11 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO �; r i � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL � A. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform inspections. C. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion. 1. At completion of roofing installation and associated work, meet with Owner, Architect, ' installer, installer of associated work, roofing system manufacturer's representative, and other representatives directly concemed with performance of roofing system. 2. Notify Architect and Owner no less than 72 hours in advance of the date and time of inspection. 3. Walk roof surface areas of the building, inspect perimeter building edges as well as flashing of roof penetrations, walts, curbs and other equipment. 4. List all items requiring correction or completion and furnish copy of list to each party in attendance. D. Repair or remove and replace components of inembrane roofing system where inspections ' indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. F. Provide written notice of acceptance of the final installation from the roofing system t manufacturer. � 3.14 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. END OF SECTION 07552 STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE(SBS)MODIFIED BITUMINOUS � 07552-12 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 07620 -SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM � � PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Manufactured Products: � a. Rain spouts. 2. Formed Products: a. Formed roof drainage sheet metal fabrications. c. Formed steep-slope roof sheet metal fabrications. B. Related Sections: 2. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry"for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. �� 3. Division 7 Section "Asphalt Shingles" for installing sheet metal flashing and trim integral with roofing. 5. Division 7 Section "Metal Roof Panels" for sheet metal flashing and trim integral with metal roof panels. 6. Division 16 Sections for heat trace wiring at gutters and downspouts. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies as indicated shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. B. Fabricate and install roof edge flashing and copings capable of resisting indicated forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49. C. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allows for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F , material surfaces. 1.3 SUBMITTALS C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop-and field-assembled work. Include the following: SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-1 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1. Identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in � Project. 2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, _ and dimensions. 3. Details for joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattem of seams. 4. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points. 5. Details of expansion joints and expansion joint covers, including showing direction of expansion and contraction. 6. Details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and counterflashings as applicable. 7. Details of special conditions. s 8. Details of connections to adjoining work. 9. Detail formed flashing and trim at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches . r � D. Samples for Verification: For each rype of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of 3 size indicated below: 1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches long by actual width of unit, including finished seam '' and in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other attachments. 2. Trim, Metal Closures, Expansion Joints, Joint Intersections, and Miscellaneous Fabrications: 12 inches long and in required profile. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories. 3. Accessories and Miscellaneous Materials: Full-size Sample. E. Qualification Data: For qualified fabricator. � F. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessories to include in maintenance manuals. G. Warranry: Sample of special warranty. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site . 1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects sheet metal flashing and trim including installers of roofing materials, roof accessories, unit skylights, and roof-mounted equipment. 2. Review methods and procedures related to sheet metal flashing and trim. 3. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and attachment to structural members. ; � SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-2 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 4. Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect sheet metal flashing. 5. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish copy of record to each participant. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materiats in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry. B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty on Fluoropolymer Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace coil- coated sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period (Fluoropolymer Finishes): 20 years from date of Substantiat Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.2 SHEET METALS A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; structural quality. 3. Surface: Smooth,flat. 4. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin � manufacturers'written instructions. 5. Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations . 6. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acryfic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil. 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS B. Self-Adhering, Polyethylene-Faced Sheet: ASTM D 1970, 40 mils(1.0 mm)thick minimum, consisting of slip-resisting polyethylene-film reinforcing and top surface laminated to SBS- modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Div. of Carlisle Companies Inc.; CCW WIP 400. b. Grace,W. R. 8�Co.; Grace Ice and Water Shield. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective ;� coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal. 1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head. a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened. 3. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 stainless steel. D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. � SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-4 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. G. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application. 2.5 MANUFACTURED SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM A. Decorative Rain Spouts: "Garaovle": Rutland Gutter Suaplv Inc. (407) 859-1119. � 1. Material: Copper. 2. Locations: As indicated. 2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and Qther characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at � the shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. .. 2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces exposed to view. B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and • within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. C. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant. D. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with silicone sealant concealed within joints. E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"and by FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for application, but not less than thickness of inetal being secured. H. Sealed Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless othennrise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 I. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. � 2.7 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long sections. Furnish flat-stock gutter spacers and gutter brackets fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by SMACNA but not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion joint covers, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters. 1. Gutter Style: As indicated. 2. Expansion Joints: Butt type with cover plate . 5. Gutters with Girth 16 to 20 Inches: Fabricate from the following materials: a. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick. C. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors. 3. Hanger Sryle: As indicated. 4. Fabricate from the following materials: a. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch thick. D. Para et Scu ers: Fabricate scu rs of dimensions re uired with closure flan e trim to � P Pp pPe Q 9 exterior, 4-inch- wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick. 2.8 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS B. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long, but not exceeding 10-foot- long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and interior leg. Miter corners, seal, and solder or weld watertight. 1. Coping Profile: As indicated. 2. Joint Style: Butt, with 12-inch- wide, concealed backup plate and 6-inch- wide, exposed cover plates. 3. Fabricate from the following materials: a. Galvanized Steel: 0.040 inch thick. E. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 2. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch thick. � SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-6 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2.9 STEEP-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Apron, Step, Cricket, and Backer Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 2. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch thick. C. Drip Edges: Fabricate from the following materials: �I �'� 2. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch thick. li� D. Eave and Rake Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 2. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch thick. E. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 2. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch thick. G. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 2. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION � 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. General: Install underlayment as indicated on Drawings. C. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Apply primer if required by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches befinreen courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-7 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL � A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, t welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as ; required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Install.sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before � fabricating sheet metal. 3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with finro fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. 4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks. 5. Install sealant tape where indicated. f 6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 7. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surFaces. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA. 1. Coat back side of stainless-steel sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious � construction. 2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene sheet. C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints. D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not less than 1- 1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws. E. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction. ; 1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section ` "Joint Sealants." � SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-8 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 3.4 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system. B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with soldered joints or with lapped joints sealed with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchored gutter brackets or straps spaced not more than 36 inches apart. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts. D. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints. 1. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. in befinreen. 2. Provide elbows at base of downspout to direct water away from building. F. Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers where indicated through parapet. Continuously support scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofing membrane. 1. Anchor scupper closure trim flange to exterior wall and seal with elastomeric sealant to scupper. 3.5 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. C. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone and as indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate. D. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and oufinrard forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone and as indicated. E. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten. F. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with sealant. Secure in a waterproof manner. G. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-9 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO ; FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 3.8 ERECTION TOLERANCES � A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder. C. Clean off excess sealants. 5 D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. E. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 07620 � � SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620- 10 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 07720-ROOF ACCESSORIES � PART 1 -GENERAL � 1.1 SUMMARY I i A. This Section includes the following: 5. Hatch-type heat and smoke vents. B. Related Sections include the following: � - 4. Division 7 stee slo e roofin Sections for rid e ven . p p 9 9 ts 5. Division 7 Section "Metal Roof Panels"for preformed metal roofing and snow guards. 7. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-fabricated metal flashing and counterflashing, roof expansion joint covers, and miscellaneous sheet metal trim and accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS � B. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. D. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, and coordinating penetrations and roof-mounted items. Show the following: 1. Size and location of roof accessories specified in this Section. 2. Method of attaching roof accessories to roof or building structure. 3. Other roof-mounted items including mechanical and electrical equipment, ductwork, piping, and conduit. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sheet Metat Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for fabrication of units, including flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofing indicated. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Pack, handle, and ship roof accessories properly labeled in heavy-duty packaging to prevent damage. ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720- 1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS v� A. Field Measurements: Verify required openings for each type of roof accessory by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace roof accessories that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. PART2-PRODUCTS � � 2.2 MANUFACTURERS � A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering j products that may be incarporat�d into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers listed in other Part 2 articles. ' 2.3 METAL MATERIALS C. Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Steel sheet metallic coated by hot-dip process and prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. � 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coated. 2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coated. 3. Exposed Finishes: High-Performance Organic Finish (2-Coat Fluoropolymer): Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surFaces to comply with � coating and resin manufacturer's written instructions. i a. Fluoropolymer 2-Coat System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with physical properties and coating performance requirements in AAMA 2605. � ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720-2 t: OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � G. Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M, unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS D. Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 726, 1 inch thick. F. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for aboveground use, complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches thick. K. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by roof accessory manufacturer. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners. L. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, or PVC; or flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork. M. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. N. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant, polyisobutylene plasticized, and heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement. O. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, nonasbestos, fibrated asphalt cement designed for trowel application or other adhesive compatible with roofing system. 2.8 HEAT AND SMOKE VENTS B. Hatch-Type Heat and Smoke Vents: Manufacturer's standard double-leaf, hatch-type heat and smoke vents with integral insulated curbs and frame, with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints, integral condensation gutter, and cap flashing. Fabricate with insulated double-wall lid, continuous weathertight perimeter lid gaskets, and equip with automatic self-lifting mechanisms, UL-listed fusible links rated at 165 deg F , and corrosion-resistant or hot-dip galvanized hardware including hinges, hold-open devices, and independent manual-release devices for inside and outside operation of lids. 1. Available Manufacturers: b. Bilco Company(The). i. Nystrom, Inc. j. O'Keeffe's Inc. 2. Size: Nominal 48 inches square unless otherwise indicated. 3. Loads: Fabricate heat and smoke vent to withstand indicated loading. a. When release is actuated, lid shall open against 10-Ibf/sq.ft. snow or wind load and lock in position. ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720-3 OZ Architecture Boutder, CO R FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 4. Regulatory Requirements: UL 793 . � 5. Heat and Smoke Vent Compliance: Provide units that have been tested and UL listed . 6. Fire Resistance of Lids: UL Class A rating. 7. Integral Curb, Framing, and Lid Material: Galvanized steel sheet, 0.079 inch thick. a. Finish: High-performance organic coating . _ 10. Insulation: Glass-fiber board. 11. Fabricate integral curbs to minimum height of 12 inches , unless otherwise indicated. 12. Sloping Roofs: Where slope of roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate curbs with height � constant . PART 3- EXECUTION � 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting perFormance of work. 1. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored and is ready to receive roof accessories. 2. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been conected. � 3.2 I NSTALLATION A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof accessories securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified. Use fasteners, . separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for completing roof � accessory installation. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement. B. Install roof accessories to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Underlayment: Where installing exposed-to-view components of roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet, or install a course of polyethylene underlayment. 3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by roof accessory manufacturers for waterproof performance. � D. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping,jogs in alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling,or tool marks. H. Heat and Smoke Vent Installation: Locate, install, and test heat and smoke vents according to NFPA 204. � ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720-4 ` OZ Architecture Boulder,CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1. Check heat and smoke vent for proper operation. Adjust operating mechanism as required. L. Seal joints with elastomeric or butyl sealant as recommended by manufacturer of roof accessories. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 07720 ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720-5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO t FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � � � ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720-6 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 07725— ROOF ICE MELT SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY jA. Provide complete roof ice melt systems consisting of snow melt panels at eaves, valleys, and other required areas; heating cables for roof drainage system gutters and downspouts; control system; and required accessories for sloped roofing. �I B. Section includes but is not necessarily limited to: 1. Roof Ice Melt(RIM)system materials and components. 2. Heating cable and accessories for roof drainage systems. 3. Controls including ambient sensing thermostats, temperature controllers, load center with ground fault circuit breakers, solid state relays, switches lights and accessories. C. Related Work In Other Sections 1. Division 7 Roofing Sections: 2. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim"for roof drainage systems. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum ten 10 ears ex erience in the desi n of roof and � ) Y P 9 I drainage de-icing systems,with a proven record of successful in-service performance. . 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's current catalo data for each roduct s ecified. Include i 9 P P model desi nations material and color charts standard drawin s and details standard g , , g . power requirements, options, and accessories. B. Manufacturer's Standard Forms: Installation Check-Out Forms. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Plans: Indicate overall layout of RIM System. 2. Detail Drawings: Indicate layouts for each RIM Section, cross section drawings, control panel drawings, and installation instructions. 3. Wiring Diagrams: Power and control wiring. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For RIM System components to include in emergency, � operation, and maintenance manuals. E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. ROOF ICE MELT SYSTEMS 07725-1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO € FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET ` VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING � A. RIM system equipment, heating cables and controls shall be delivered in undamaged ' condition. The jobsite supervisor will inspect the materials when delivered and notify the = trucking company and manufacturer of any damage within 24 hours of receipt of materials. f 1.5 WARRANTY A. Heating Cables:Warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of iwo (2)years from date of final acceptance. � B. Controls: Warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one (1) � year from date of acceptance. t C. The manufacturer, at his option, shall either repair or supply replacement materials if that material is defective per the above warranty definitions. i PART 2-PRODUCTS � � 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Roof Ice Melt systems are based on the products of Bylin Engineered Systems, 4800 Golden Foothill Parkway EI Dorado Hills, CA, (1-888-313-5666). Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the basis-of-design � manufacturer or other manufacturer acceptable to Architect. f � f 2.2 ROOF ICE MELT(RIM)SYSTEM A. RIM Cover Panels to be 40 mil aluminum with "Kynar" or equivalent paint finish, color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. Include eave, valley, low pitch, and t other panel types and accessories required for a complete system. r � 2.3 HEATING CABLES A. The heating cable shall be UL and CSA listed specifically as electric roof and gutter de-icing � and snow-melting equipment. � B. The heating cable shall be of parallel resistance construction capable of being cut to length and terminated in the field. ' C. The heating cable shall consist of finro parallel nickel-plated copper bus wires embedded in a radiation cross-linked self-regulating conductive polymer core specifically designed for snow and ice melting.The heating cable shall be capable of varying its heat output along its ` entire length. The heating cable shall include a polyolefin dielectric jacket rated 300 VAC at � 105°C, a tinned-copper braid (14 AWG equivalent wire size), and a UV stabilized polyolefin overjacket. � � Y � ROOF ICE MELT SYSTEMS 07725-2 = OZ Architecture Boulder,CO ' � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 2.4 CONTROLS A. Custom engineered high efficiency control panel to control the operation of the RIM System and gutter and downspout heating cables. The control panel shall include a load center with 30ma ground fault circuit breakers, temperature controllers, solid state relays, terminal �I block and accessories. 2.5 JUNCTION BOX/POWER TERMINATION A. The heating cable circuits shall be connected to the power wiring in an approved junction box with approved termination components. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. The Contractor shall inspect the materials supplied against the Packing List and Design and Installation Manual. The Contractor shall note any discrepancies and work with the manufacturer to resolve. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. The RIM System, roof drainage heating cable system and controls shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's Design and Installation Manual. Any deviations shall be reviewed and approved by the manufacturer. B. Coordinate with the RIM System and heating cable installers, the gutter and downspout installers and the control panel wiring and section conduit and junction box wiring installers. C. The electrical contractor shall test the heating cables, complete the test forms and submit them to the Manufacturer for review and approval. D. Coordinate work of this Section with roofing, flashing, and sealant work to insure a watertight installation. END OF SECTION 07725 ROOF ICE MELT SYSTEMS 07725-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO i � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � E � i` i � i ; _ # s � ROOF ICE MELT SYSTEMS 07725-4 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 k. SECTION 07811 -SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Concealed SFRM. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for surface conditions required for structural steel receiving SFRM. 3. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for fire-resistance-rated firestopping systems. 4. Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for fire-resistance-rated joint systems. 1.2 DEFINITIONS �� A. SFRM: Sprayed fire-resistive material. B. Concealed: Fire-resistive materials applied to surfaces that are concealed from view behind other construction when the Work is completed. 1.3 SUBMITTALS B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. D. Product Certificates: For each type of SFRM, signed by product manufacturer. E. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer and testing agency. F. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From SFRM manufacturer indicating the following: 1. Materials have been tested for bond with substrates. 2. Materials have been verified by SFRM manufacturer to be compatible with substrate primers and coatings. 3. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency,for proposed SFRM. H. Research/Evaluation Reports: For SFRM. SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS 07811 -1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � t ; FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE � �: A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by SFRM manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install manufacturer's products according to specified requirements. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its SFRM to Contractor or to an installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer. B. Source Limitations: Obtain SFRM through one source from a single manufacturer. C. SFRM Testing: By a qualified testing and inspecting agency engaged by Contractor or manufacturer to test for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods. 1. SFRMs are randomly selected for testing from bags bearing the applicable classification marking of UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Testing is performed on specimens of SFRMs that comply with laboratory testing requirements specified in Part 2 and are otherwise identical to installed fire-resistive materials, including application of accelerant, sealers, topcoats, tamping, troweling, rolling, and water overspray, if any of these are used in final application. 3. Testing is performed on specimens whose application the independent testing and inspecting agency witnessed during preparation and conditioning. Include in test reports a full description of preparation and conditioning of laboratory test specimens. D. Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to � test for compliance with requirements for specified perFormance and test methods. 1. Test for bond per ASTM E 736 and requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" for coating materials. Provide bond strength indicated in referenced fire-resistance design, but not less than minimum specified in Part 2. . 2. Verify that manufacturer, through its own laboratory testing or field experience, has not found primers or coatings to be incompatible with SFRM. E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify bags containing SFRM with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for SFRM serving as direct-applied protection tested per ASTM E 119. 2. Surface-Buming Characteristics: ASTM E 84. F. Provide products containing no detectable asbestos as determined according to the method specified in 40 CFR 763, Subpart E, Appendix E, Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy." H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to SFRM including, but not limited to, the following: � SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS 07811 -2 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET ' VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � 1. Review products, exposure conditions, design ratings, restrained and unrestrained conditions, calculations, densities, thicknesses, bond strengths, and other perFormance requirements. 2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify sequencing and coordination requirements. 3. Review weather predictions, ambient conditions, and proposed temporary protections for SFRM during and after installation. 4. Review surface conditions and preparations. 5. Review field quality-control testing procedures. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to Project site in original, unopened packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, shelf life if applicable, and fire-resistance ratings applicable to Project. B. Use materials with limited shelf life within period indicated. Remove from Project site and discard materials whose shelf life has expired. C. Store materials inside, under cover, and aboveground; keep dry until ready for use. Remove from Project site and discard wet or deteriorated materials. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply SFRM when ambient or substrate temperature is 40 deg F or lower unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain temperature at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after product application. B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of SFRM. Use natural means or, if they are inadequate, forced-air circulation until fire-resistive material dries thoroughly. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Sequence and coordinate application of SFRM with other related work specified in other Sections to comply with the following requirements: 1. Provide temporary enclosure as required to confine spraying operations and protect the environment. 2. Provide temporary enclosures for applications to prevent deterioration of fire-resistive material due to exposure to weather and to unfavorable ambient conditions for humidity,temperature, and ventilation. 3. Avoid unnecessary exposure of fire-resistive material to abrasion and other damage likely to occur during construction operations subsequent to its application. 4. Do not apply fire-resistive material to metal roof deck substrates until concrete topping, if any, has been completed. For metal roof decks without concrete topping, do not apply fire-resistive material to metal roof deck substrates until roofing has been completed; prohibit roof traffic during application and drying of fire-resistive material. SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS 07811 -3 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 i 5. Do not apply fire-resistive material to metai floor deck substrates until concrete � ,: topping has been completed. 6. Do not begin applying fire-resistive material until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items penetrating fire protection are in place. � E 7. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying fire- resistive material until application of fire protection is completed. 8. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fire-resistive material has been applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to defective � applications. � PART 2 - PRODUCTS i 2.2 CONCEALED SFRM `• � A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide concealed cementitious or sprayed-fiber SFRM by one of the following: � 1. Carboline Company; Fireproofing Products Division. 2. Grace, W. R. � Co. -Conn., Construction Products Div. 3. Isolatek Intemational Corp. E. Material Coriiposition: Manufacturer's standard product, either of the following: 1. Concealed Cementitious SFRM: Factory-mixed, dry formulation of gypsum or portland cement binders, additives, and lighfinreight mineral or synthetic aggregates � mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar for conveyance and application. 2. Concealed Sprayed-Fiber Fire-Resistive Material: Factory-mixed, dry formulation of inorganic binders, mineral fibers, fillers, and additives conveyed in a dry state by pneumatic equipment and mixed with water at spray.nozzle to form a damp, as- applied product. F. Physical Properties: Minimum values, unless otherwise indicated, or higher values required to attain designated fire-resistance ratings, measured per standard test methods referenced s with each property as follows: 1. Dry Density: 15 Ib/cu. ft. for average and individual densities, or greater if required to attain fire-resistance ratings indicated, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method." 2. Thickness: Minimum average thickness required for fire-resistance design indicated ` according to the following criteria, but not less than 0.375 inch, per ASTM E 605: a. Where the referenced fire-resistance design lists a thickness of 1 inch or more, the minimum allowable individual thickness of SFRM is the design thickness minus 0.25 inch. b. Where the referenced fire-resistance design lists a thickness of less than 1 inch but more than 0.375 inch, the minimum allowable individual thickness of SFRM is the greater of 0.375 inch or 75 percent of the design thickness. � SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS 07811 -4 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 c. No reduction in average thickness is permitted for those fire-resistance designs whose fire-resistance ratings were established at densities of less than 15 Ib/cu. � ft.. 3. Bond Strength: 150 Ibf/sq. ft. minimum per ASTM E 736 based on laboratory testing of 0.75-inch minimum thickness of SFRM. 4. Compressive Strength: 5.21 Ibf/sq. in. minimum per ASTM E 761. Minimum thickness of SFRM tested shall be 0.75 inch and minimum dry density shall be as specified but not less than 15 Ib/cu. ft.. 5. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion per ASTM E 937. 6. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 759. 7. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 760. 8. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 g/sq. ft. in 24 hours per ASTM E 859. For laboratory tests, minimum thickness of SFRM is 0.75 inch, maximum dry density is 15 Ib/cu. ft., test specimens are not prepurged by mechanically induced air velocities, and tests are terminated after 24 hours. 9. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM with the following surface- buming characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: a. Flame-Spread Index: 10 or less . b. Smoke-Developed Index: 0 . 10. Fungal Resistance: No observed growth on specimens per ASTM G 21. 2.5 AUXILIARY FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary fire-resistive materials that are compatible with SFRM and substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of work. A substrate is in satisfactory condition if it complies with the following: 1. Substrates comply with requirements in the Section where the substrate and related materials and construction are specified. 2. Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, incompatible primers, incompatible paints, incompatible encapsulants, or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fire-resistive materials with substrates under conditions of normal use or fire exposure. 3. Objects penetrating fire-resistive material, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates. SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS 07811 -5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 4. Substrates are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, and other suspended � construction that will interfere with applying fire-resistive material. i B. Verify that concrete work on steel deck has been completed. ; C. Verify that roof construction, installation of roof-top HVAC equipment, and other related work are completed. € D. Conduct tests according to fire-resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations ` to verify that substrates are free of substances capable of interfering with bond. E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 32 PREPARATION � A. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fire-resistive materials during application. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fire-resistive material, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants. 3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL A. Comply with fire-resistive material manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials, � $ application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and spray on fire- _ resistive material, as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. f B. Apply SFRM that is iderrtical to products tested as specified in Part 1 "Quality Assurance" F Article and substantiated by test reports,with respect to rate of application, accelerator use, � sealers, topcoats, tamping, troweling, water overspray, or other materials and procedures affecting test results. D. Coat substrates with bonding adhesive before applying fire-resistive material where 4' required to achieve fire-resistance rating or as recommended in writing by SFRM �: manufacturer for material and application indicated. j E. Extend fire-resistive material in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected. Unless otherwise recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer, install body of fire-resistive covering in a single course. F. Spray apply fire-resistive materials to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer. � SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS 07811 -6 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 3.4 APPLICATION, CONCEALED SFRM � I ss tha n those re uired to i ies not e in hick nesses a nd denst n aled SFRM t q A. Apply co ce chieve fire-resistance ratin s desi nated for each condition, but apply in greater a g 9 thicknesses and densities if specified in Part 2 "Concealed SFRM"Article. B. Apply water overspray to concealed sprayed-fiber fire-resistive material as required to obtain designated fire-resistance rating. C. Cure concealed SFRM according to product manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspection and prepare reports: 1. SFRM. C. Tests and Inspections: Testing and inspecting of completed applications of SFRM shall take place in successive stages, in areas of extent and using methods as follows. Do not proceed with application of SFRM for the next area until test results for previously completed applications of SFRM show compliance with requirements. Tested values must .. equal or exceed va►ues indicated and required for approved fire-resistance design. 1. Thickness for Floor, Roof, and Wall Assemblies: For each 1000-sq. ft. area, or partial area, on each floor, from the average of 4 measurements from a 144-sq. in. sample area, with sample width of not less than 6 inches per ASTM E 605. 2. Thickness for Structural Frame Members: From a sample of 25 percent of structural members per floor, taking 9 measurements at a single cross section for structural frame beams or girders, 7 measurements of a single cross section for joists and trusses, and 12 measurements of a single cross section for columns per � ASTM E 605. � 3. Density for Floors, Roofs, Walts, and Structural Frame Members: At frequency and from sample size indicated for determining thickness of each type of construction and structural framing member, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method." 4. Bond Strength for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Framing Members: For each 10,000-sq. ft. area, or partial area, on each floor, cohesion and adhesion from one sample of size indicated for determining thickness of each type of construction and structural framing member, per ASTM E 736. a. Field test SFRM that is applied to flanges of wide-flange, structural-steel members on surFaces matching those that will exist for remainder of steel receiving fire-resistive material. b. If surfaces of structural steel receiving SFRM are primed or otherwise painted for coating materials, perForm series of bond tests specified in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory." Provide bond strength indicated in referenced UL fire- resistance criteria, but not less than 150 Ibf/sq. ft. minimum per ASTM E 736. SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS 07811 -7 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO i FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET ` VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 5. If testing finds applications of SFRM are not in compliance with requirements, testing � ' and inspecting agency will perform additional random testing to determine extent of � noncompliance. D. Remove and replace applications of SFRM that do not pass tests and inspections for cohesion and adhesion, for density, or for both and retest as specified above. E. Apply additional SFRM, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results indicate ` that thickness does not comply with specified requirements, and retest as specified above. 3.8 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIR A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling. B. Protect SFRM, according to advice of product manufacturer and Installer, from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so fire protection will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. C. Coordinate application of SFRM with other construction to minimize need to cut or remove fire protection. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect SFRM and patch any damaged or removed areas. � D. Repair or replace work that has not successfully protected steel. � END OF SECTION 07811 � SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS 07811 -8 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 07841 -THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fire- resistance-rated constructions, including both empry openings and openings containing penetrating items. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems." 2. Division 13 Sections specifying fire-suppression piping penetrations. 3. Division 15 Sections specifying duct and piping penetrations. 4. Division 16 Sections specifying cable and conduit penetrations. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: For penetrations through fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. B. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings determined per ASTM E 814 : 1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 2. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration firestop systems with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, where systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas: a. Penetrations located outside wall cavities. b. Penetrations located outside fire-resistance-rated shaft enclosures. C. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction. 1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-resistant through-penetration firestop systems. 2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches in width and exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor il loads involved, either by installing floor plates or by other means. THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - 1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO I � F, 2 3 2 FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 k 3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop � s systems not requiring removal of insulation. � � D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame- ; spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. � 3 % 1.3 SUBMITTALS � � B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. � C. Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, show each type of p construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and type of ; penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting � agency that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition indicated. � < 1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop system configuration for construction and penetrating items. 2. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting r agency's illustration for a particular through-penetration firestop condition, submit � illustration, with modifications marked, approved by through-penetration firestop � system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer. ; � D. Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Indicate locations of each through- � x penetration firestop system, along with the following information: � 1. Types of penetrating items. 2. Types of constructions penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and, where � applicable, thicknesses of construction penetrated. 3. Through-penetration firestop systems for each location identified by firestop design x designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. E t E. Qualification Data: For Installer. € - F. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating through-penetration �� firestop system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current F products. � � � 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing through-penetration firestop systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. � �: B. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems in ` Project to a single qualified installer. �: � �: THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 -2 � � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO i � i r FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 C. Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetration and construction condition indicated, through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements"Article: 1. Firestopping tests are perFormed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities � having jurisdiction. �� 2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Part 1 Performance Requirements" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to through-penetration firestop system designations listed by the following: 1) UL in its"Fire Resistance Directory." 2) Other testing agencies acceptable to�authorities having jurisdiction. E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Project Management and Coordination." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver through-penetration firestop system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and • manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life if applicable, qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials for through-penetration firestop systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install through-penetration firestop systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems per manufacturers written instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 -3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � £ FIRST CHAIR PERM�T SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 1.7 COORDINATION � k A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through- b penetration firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements. B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate through-penetration firestop systems. � E. Where inspection or examination of through-penetration firestop system installations is required by authorities having jurisdiction, do not cover up installations that will become concealed behind other construction until inspections or examinations have been r completed. F PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide through-penetration firestop � systems indicated for each required application that are produced by one of the following ; manufacturers: � 1. Hilti, Inc. 2. Nelson Firestop Products. t 3. Specified Technologies Inc. � a 4. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division. ` �: s. 2.3 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one � another; with the substrates forming openings; and with the items, if any, penetrating � through-penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as � demonstrated by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by through-penetration firestop system ` manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. Accessories may include, but are not limited to,the following items: ` r 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following: a. Slag-/rock-wool-fiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. � c. Fire-rated form board. � d. Fillers for sealants. � 2. Temporary forming materials. � i THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 -4 f OZ Architecture Boulder, CO ` r FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET II'� VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves. 2.4 FILL MATERIALS A. General: Provide through-penetration firestop systems containing the types of fill materials indicated by referencing the types of materials described in this Article. Fill materials are those referred to in directories of referenced testing and inspecting agencies as "fill," "void," or"cavity" materials. 2.5 MIXING A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water(if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions,with Installer present,for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of work. . 1. Proceed with installation onty after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through-penetration firestop systems to comply with firestop system manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of through-penetration firestop systems. 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with through-penetration firestop systems. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 -5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � :. FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 d C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through-penetration firestop systems from .� � contacting adjoining surFaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that � would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates. 3.3 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and with firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross- �ectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems. C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. � 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify through-penetration firestop systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of edge of the firestop systems so that labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Use mechanical fasteners for metal labels. For plastic labels, use self- adhering type with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surFaces on which labels are placed and, in combination with label material, will result in partial destruction of label if removal is attempted. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "V1/arning -Through-Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name. F THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 -6 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO t' FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � II � 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspecting Agency: Owner may engage a qualified, independent inspecting agency to inspect through-penetration firestops. Independent inspecting agency shall comply with ASTM E 2174 requirements including those related to qualifications, conducting inspections, and preparing test reports. B. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through-penetration firestop systems so they comply with requirements. C. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements. END OF SECTION 07841 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 -7 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO L � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 ' � � f t p S t i � � Y t 4 S l Y � t f k �( ) � k THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 -8 � t OZ Architecture Boulder,CO y s FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 07842 - FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fire-resistive joint systems for the following: 3. Head-0f-wall joints. B. Related Sections include the following: 3. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for systems installed in openings in walls and floors with and without penetrating items. 4. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"for non-fire-resistive joint sealants. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Integrity Rating: Measure of system's ability to withstand fire exposure without permitting passage of flame through openings or occurrence of flaming on any element of the unexposed surface of the fill material or floor or on the interior surFace of the wall above the fill material. � B. Insulation Rating: Measure of system's resistance to both flame passage and heat transfer and requires maximum temperature rise on unexposed side of the fill material or on interior surface of the wall 1 inch above fill material not to exceed 325 degrees F above starting temperature. For system's having a clearance distance of 6 inches or greater befinreen wall and structural slab, average temperature rise shall not exceed 250 degrees F above • starting temperature. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assembly in which fire-resistive joint systems are installed. B. Joint Systems in and between Fire-Resistance-Rated Constructions: Provide systems with assembly ratings equaling or exceeding the respective ratings of construction that they join, indicated as determined by UL 2079 or ASTM E 1966. D. For fire-resistive systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread and smoke- developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. E. Expansion and Contraction: Perimeter fire containment systems shall accommodate movement of the exterior wall due to thermal expansion and contraction and normally anticipated live load, wind, and seismic forces. FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842-1 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO ,} 6 �: FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1.4 SUBMITTALS � B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 4 C. Shop Drawings: For each fire-resistive joint system, show each kind of construction condition in which joints are installed; also show relationships to adjoining construction. Include fire-resistive joint system design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that demonstrates compliance with ` requirements for each condition indicated. s 1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each fire-resistive joint system configuration for t construction and penetrating items. D. Product Certificates: For each rype of fire-resistive joint system, signed by product manufacturer. E. Qualification Data: For Installer. H. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each type of fire-resistive joint system, indicating compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. � t 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE B. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of fire-resistive joint systems in Project to a single qualified installer. � � C. Source Limitations: Obtain fire-resistive joint systems, for each kind of joint and ' construction condition indicated, through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "PerFormance Requirements" Article: 1. Fire-resistance tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for fire-resistive joint systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Fire-resistive joint systems are identical to those tested per methods indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements"Article and comply with the following: a. Fire-resistive joint system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Fire-resistive joint systems correspond to those indicated by referencing system designations of the qualified testing and inspecting agency. �` 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver fire-resistive joint system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project and with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and � FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842-2 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials for fire-resistive joint systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture,temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire-resistive joint systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Ventilate fire-resistive joint systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, if this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed according to specified requirements. B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire-resistive joint systems and maintain typical .. 3/<-inch vertical deflection clearances unless otherwise indicated. E. Where inspection or examination of fire-resistive joint system installations is required by authorities having jurisdiction, do not cover up installations that will become concealed behind other construction until inspections or examinations have been completed. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire-resistive joint systems that have been tested and listed by UL or another testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for each application indicated. 2.3 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS A. Compatibility: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that are compatible with joint substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for systems indicated. FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842 -3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � Y � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � � PART 3-EXECUTION � f 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements ' for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 32 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing fire-resistive joint systems to comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of fill materials. 2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. .. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. � C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire-resistive joint system from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from fire-resistive joint system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing fire-resistive joint system's seal with substrates or damaging adjoining surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with Part 1 "PerFormance Requirements" Article and fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming/packing/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. C. Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings and forming/packing/backing materials as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints. � FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842-4 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspecting Agency: Owner may engage a qualified independent inspecting agency to inspect fire-resistive joint systems and prepare inspection reports. B. Testing Services: Inspecting of completed installations of fire-resistive joint systems shall take place in successive stages as installation of fire-resistive joint systems proceeds. Do not proceed with installation of joint systems for the next area until inspecting agency determines completed work shows compliance with requirements. 1. Inspecting agency shall state in each report whether inspected fire-resistive joint systems comply with or deviate from requirements. C. Remove and replace fire-resistive joint systems where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. D. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. E. Proceed vuith enclosing fire-resistive joint systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and fire-resistive joint systems comply with requirements. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to joints as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure fire- resistive joint systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire-resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements. END OF SECTION 07842 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842-5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � � � - f f � � � � ; i { � � t 1 � � � � 4' S • f � Y fi € f i S i � P' 'v � � 4 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842-6 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO }. € FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 07920-JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes joint sealants for the applications indicated in the Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for sealing joints in fire-resistance- rated construction. 2. Division 8 Section"Glazing"for glazing sealants. 3. Division 9 Section "Ceramic Tile"for sealing tile joints. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water- resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 1.3 SUBMITTALS B. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch wide joints formed befinreen two 6-inch long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. D. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibiliry and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. E. Product Test Reports: Based on comprehensive testing of product formulations performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements. F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. JOINT SEALANTS 07920-1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 $: � L 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ; A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for ; installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project. ; B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, E for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. j � 1. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation � techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint '' substrates. 2. Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, � shims,joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. ' 3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers. i 5. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation ° data that are based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, ` and compatibility with,joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted. E i D. Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals" ` Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a � 36-month period preceding the commencement of the Work. { 2 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. . 2. Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods. � 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 4 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for � applications indicated. 4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from ' joint substrates. � 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Installers Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other � ` requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. JOINT SEALANTS 07920-2 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � € � f- 5 FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty for Silicone Sealants: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to �'� repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warran Period: 20 ears from date of Substantial Com letion. tY Y P C. Special Manufacturer's Warranty for Urethane Sealants: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. D. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide joint sealants listed in other Part 2 articles by the following manufacturers: 1. Dow-Coming. 2. G E Silicones. 3. Pecora Corp. 4. Sonnebom/ChemRex, Inc. 5. Tremco Inc. 2.3 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates, flashings, and other contact materials under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. JOINT SEALANTS 07920-3 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � � 2.4 SEALANTS � A. Silicone Mildew Resistant Sealant: � 1. ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. 2. One-part silicone rubber sealant specially formulated with a fungicide for use in sani- tary non-porous applications. � B. Acrylic-Latex Sealant: t 1. ASTM C 834. 2. One-part, non-sag, general purpose, paintable, siliconized acrylic latex sealant. Joint movement capability of+7.5 percent, -7.5 percent C. Urethane Self-Leveling Sealant: 1. ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25. � 2. Two-part, self-leveling polyurethane sealant for horizontal contraction and expansion control joints. Joint movement capability of+25 percent, -25 percent. D. Urethane Construction Sealant: r � 1. ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50. ` 2. Two-part, non-sag, polyurethane rubber sealant. Joint movement capability of +50 percent, -50 percent ; E. Silicone Construction Sealant: � ? 1. ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50. 2. One-part, neutral cure, silicone sealant. Joint movement capability of +50 percent, -50 percent. Non-staining and non-bleeding type. . ; { F. Acoustical Joint Sealant: r 1. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining = latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airbome � sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as � demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. ' 2. Basis-of-Design Product: "AIS-919 Acoustical and Insulation Latex Sealant", Pecora � Corporation. � 2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING � A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved ' for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of type and of size and density to control ; sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: � JOINT SEALANTS 07920-4 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO ; FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant- substrate tests and field tests or manufacturer's joint preparation data. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: , 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound I� substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose ��, particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. � d. Wood. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 -5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � � � �, k FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � � 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. � 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint � sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: � �: a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. � f { B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant � manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. � Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine � primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining t surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with � adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such { contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape � immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. i [: , 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS � .. � A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for � products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. � , B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of � joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. � x C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at . � position required to produce cross-seGtional shapes and depths of installed sealants ; relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. � 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. ; 2. Do not stretch,twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. ;, �, 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. ¢ D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same ; time backings are installed: ; � 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 4 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. ; 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact ; and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. � � :: 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. ;; JOINT SEALANTS 07920-6 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint configuration where indicated per Figure 56 in ASTM C 1193. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure 5C in ASTM C 1193. a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 3.7 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Silicone Mi�dew Resistant Sealant: Building interior joints in moist or damp areas suscepti- ble to mildew, including toilet rooms, shower rooms, and similar areas. B. Acrylic-Latex Sealant: Building interior joints where another type of sealant is not otherwise specified or scheduled, and no or minimal joint movement is anticipated. C. Urethane Self-Leveling Sealant: Horizontal joints in building interior concrete floors and ex- terior concrete walks and drives. D. Urethane Construction Sealant: Building joints on Interior side of exterior walls, and where moderate joint movement is anticipated. E. Silicone Construction Sealant: Building joints on exterior side of exterior walls. F. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Interior acoustical joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. END OF SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS 07920-7 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO �' � # FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � � ; � i s= i � . � � JOINT SEALANTS 07920-8 E OZ Architecture Boulder, CO �; � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 08110 -STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standard hollow metal doors. B. Related Sections: 4. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow metal doors. 5. Division 9 Painting and Coating Sections for field painting hollow metal doors and frames. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings. B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 1.3 SUBMITTALS B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions,fire-resistance rating, and finishes. C. Shop Drawings: lnclude the following: 1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages,joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. E. Other Action Submittals: 1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule. G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110- 1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE � A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer. B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to UL 10C. D. Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105 or UL 1784 . E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site . 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished units. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidiry. { 1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space befinreen each stacked door to permit air circulation. � 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before ' fabrication. x 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. i PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: ` � STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-2 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 2. Curries Company;an Assa Abloy Group company. 3. Kewanee Corporation (The). 4. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 5. Windsor Republic Doors. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011 M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surFace defects; pickled and oiled. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum A40 metallic coating. D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591 M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011 M, hot-dip galvanized according to -. ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. � E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. H. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6-to 12-Ib/cu. ft. density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless othenNise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8. 1. Design: Flush panel . 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polysryrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core. a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated. b. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: Where indicated, provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 11.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu when tested according to ASTM C 1363. 1) Locations: Exterior doors . 3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Beveled at both edges . STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET ' � VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 g a. Beveled Edges: 1/8 inch in 2 inches. � 4. Vertical Edges for pouble-Acting Doors: Round vertical edges with 2-1/8-inch radius. 5. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch-thick, end closures K or channels of same material as face sheets. �: 6. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel } Doors and Frames." B. Exterior poors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Provide doors ' complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and ; model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 3. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A(Extra Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush) . C. Interior poors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level. 3. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush) . ` D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets. E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. � r 3 2.5 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated. & 5. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch-thick steel sheet. ' C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. ` 2. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 3. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated. 4. Fabricate living unit frames as knocked down . 7. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch-thick steel sheet. 10. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet. 11. Frames for Borrowed Lights: Same as adjacent door frame. D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames. f � STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-4 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO �' � � z FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2.8 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perForated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick. 2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick. 3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors. 4. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch- diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall,with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location. B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick, and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface. 2.10 STOPS AND MOLDINGS �� B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch high unless otherwise indicated. 2.13 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of inetal. Where practical,fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117 . C. Hollow Metal Doors: 1. Exterior poors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth,flush, and invisible. 3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � E � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET ; VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 5. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot � ; welds per anchor. 6. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: '' a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom _ of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 120 inches high. b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 ; inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high. 5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions. c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb. d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top � and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c. f- 7. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door � silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. . t a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. ; b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers. E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either � cold-or hot-rolled steel sheet. r F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." 1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8 . 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted � door hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 2.14 STEEL FINISHES 4� A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and � s pretreating. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-6 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � t, FIRST CHAfR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation. C. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to perFormance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, finrist, and plumbness to the following tolerances: 1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. 2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. 3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face comers of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. 4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor. C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11 . STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-7 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � � ; FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until � permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary �' braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. � a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling k limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind,fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have � been properly set and secured. � f. Check plumbness, squareness, and finrist of frames as walls are constructed. € Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. ' 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. 3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout. 5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Take precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or damaged by grout forces. 6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 7. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled � expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 9. Head Reinforcement: For frames more than 48 inches wide in masonry wall openings, provide continuous steel channel or angle stiffener, 0.093 (12 gage) inch thick for full width of opening,welded to back of frame at head. � 10. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. ; b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line ; parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. � C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. �� i 1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors: a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. s b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. � d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor(No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch. � STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-8 ' OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � 2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 3. Smoke-Control Doors: Instatl doors according to NFPA 105. D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective� work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation. C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. D. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint -. according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-9 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 �: � � � � � i t F � � + E i i E � 4. f � i , STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110- 10 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO z z FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 08141 — FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 —GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES 1. Work under this section comprises of furnishing solid core doors (wood veneer faces and hardboard/MDF) light frames, factory fitting and machining and factory finishing for fire labeled and non labeled wood doors. B. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Related documents, drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specification sections apply to this section. C. RELATED SECTIONS 1. 062000— Finish Carpentry 2. 064816— Interior Wood Door Frames 3. 080114—Operation and Maintenance of Wood Doors 4. 081113— Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 5. 084100—Entrances and Storefronts 6. 087100— Door Hardware 7. 088100—Glass Glazing 8. 099000—Painting � 9. 281300—Access Control 1.02 REFERENCES A. STANDARDS 1. ASTM E90— Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements 2. ASTM E413—Classification for Rating Sound Insulation 3. NFPA-80— Fire Doors and Windows 4. NFPA-105 — Recommend Practice for Installation of Smoke Controlled Door Assemblies 5. WDMA I.S. 1A — Wood Door Manufacturer's Association, Flush Wood Door Performance Standards 6. UL10C-Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08141 - 1 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Loveland, CO � P FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � � B. CODES 1. NFPA-101 —Life Safety Code - 2. IBC 2003— International Building Code 3. ANSI-A117.1 —Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 4. ADA—Americans with Disabilities Act 1.03 SUBMITTALS � A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1. Submit copies of the hollow metal door and frame shop drawings in accordance with Division 1, General Requirements. B. PRODUCT DATA 1. Submit shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of wood doors. Include ` details of door elevations, details of construction, location and installation ; requirements of door hardware. r C. SHOP DRAWINGS 1. Provide a schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details ; and door openings as those on the contract documents. Shop drawings should � include the following information: a. Door core material. b. Mortises and reinforcements. ` a c. Glazed and louvered openings and material. d. Mounting locations of standard hardware. . e. Elevation drawings. D. SAMPLES 1. Upon request submit the following samples: a. Comer sections of doors approximately 8" x 10" with door faces and edgings representing the typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer and solid lumber required. b. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8" x 10" inches, for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in the finished work. c. Frames for light openings, 6" long, for each material,type, and finish required. d. Louver blade and frame sections, 6 inches long, for each material and finish specified. t � FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08141 -2 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Loveland,CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL COLO RADO MARCH 4, 2010 I � � 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. SUBSTITUTIONS 1. All substitution requests must be submitted within the procedures and time frame as outlined in Division 1, General Requirements. Approval of products is at the discretion of the architect and his consultant. B. MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS 1. Manufacturer shall be a member in good standing of the Wood Door Manufacturer's Association (WDMA). 2. Wherever possible obtain wood doors from a single manufacturer to ensure uniformity in quality of appearance and construction. All material supplied for this project to conform to WDMA I.S. 1A-97 for premium grade wood doors. C. SUPPLIER QUALIFICATIONS 1. A recognized supplier who has maintained an office and has been furnishing material in the projecYs vicinity for a period of at least finro (2) years. The supplier shall have warehouse and shop facilities to accommodate this project and must be an authorized factory distributor of all products specified herein. D. FIRE RATED DOORS 1. Project requires door assemblies and components that are compliant with positive pressure and S-label requirements. Specifications must be cross-referenced and coordinated with hardware and other door manufacturers to ensure that total opening engineering is compatible with UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and UBC 7-2, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. a. Certification(s) of compliance shall be made available upon request by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. b. For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size. 2. A physical label to be permanently a�xed to the fire door at an authorized faciliry. Furthermore, all 45, 60, and 90 minute label fire doors are to have manufacturer's standard laminated stiles for improved screw holding and split resistance capability. a. At stairwell enclosures and where otherwise indicated, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 250 deg F above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure FLUSH WOOD DOO RS 08141 -3 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Loveland,CO s � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � 1.05 DELtVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect doors during transit, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and �: deterioration. Doors are to be shipped from manufacturer in individual polybags, and shall be inspected immediately upon arrival at jobsite for any damage of defects. B. Identify each door with individual opening numbers that correlate with designation system used on shop drawings and contract drawings for door, frames and hardware. �� Use only temporary, removable, or concealed markings. C. Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed and weather tight, wet-work is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and relative humidity at occupancy level in storage and installation areas. i 1.06 WARRANTY A. Warranties shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of other rights the owner may have under the contract documents. B. Submit written warranty on manufacturer's standard form signed by the manufacturer agreeing to replace or repair defective door.s which have: 1. Delamination in any degree. 2. Warp or twist of 1/4"or more in any 3' x 6"x 7' plane of door face. � 3. Telegraphing of stile, rait or core through face to cause surface variation in excess of 1/100" in any 3" spans. C. Contractor shall replace or refinish doors where contractor's work contributed to rejection or voiding of manufacturer's warranty. D. Solid core interior doors shall be warranted for the life of their installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide wood doors by one of the manufacturers as listed. 2.02 FIRE RATED DOORS 1. All fire rated doors shall be supplied to meet UL10C positive pressure standards for category "A" doors. All required intumescent seals shall be concealed into the edge of the door; frame applied intumescent seals are not acceptable. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08141 -4 � ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Loveland, CO € � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2.03 DOORS A. FACES FOR PAINT FINISH 1. Doors shall have premium grade A faces with manufacturer's standard five (5) ply construction; minimum 1/8"thick with stiles and rails bonded to the core. 2. Faces shall be minimum 1/50"at 12% moisture content thick after finish sanding. a. Veneer Cut: Rotary Cut b. Veneer Species: Natural Birch 3. Exposed vertical edges shall be of the same species as the face material. 4. Doors shall have minimum 1" stiles on the hinge stile and 13/16" minimum on the lock stile; both stiles faces shall match the door veneer. Top and bottom rails shall be a minimum 13/16"; rails shall be mill option hardwood or structural composite lumber (SCL). B. NON RATED AND 20 MINUTE DOORS -� 1. Supply engineered core complying with WDMA I.S. 1A, bonded to door faces, stiles and rails using a Type I adhesive. Components are to be assembled to meet or exceed 20 minute fire door specifications for UL10c fire test requirements. Door shall meet or exceed WDMA I.S. 1A Extra Heavy Duty performance standards. a. Algoma: FGFW b. Eggers: SCL5/SCL5-20 c. Graham: GPD EC5/GPD EC5-20 d. Marshfield: DCL-1 /DCL-20 � e. VT Industries: 5508 � C. FIRE RATED DOORS OVER 20 MINUTES 1. Supply fire resistive composite mineral core construction to provide the fire rating indicated, boned to door faces, stiles and raits using a Type I adhesive. Components are to be assembled to meet or exceed fire door specifications for UL10C fire test requirements. a. Algoma: FD b. Eggers: FGP c. Graham: GPD FD5 d. Marshfield: DFM e. VT Industries: 5545/5511 2. For mineral-core doors, provide composite blocking with improved screw holding capability approved for use in doors of fire ratings indicated as necessary to eliminate need for through-bolting hardware and as follows: a. Provide 5"top-rail blocking. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08141 -5 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Loveland, CO > E, � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � b. Provide 4 1/2"x 10" lock blocks. c. Provide 5" mid-rail blocking, at doors indicated to have exit devices. 3. At hinge stiles, provide manufacturer's standard laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance and with outer stile matching face veneer. 2.04 FIELD FINISHING A. Field Finish wood doors in accordance with Division 9, Painting. 2.05 LIGHT FRAMES A. Provide wood beads for light openings in doors up to and including 20-minute rating; at 20-minute rated doors provide wood beads and metal glazing clips approved for such use. 1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces. 2. Profile: Flush rectangular beads. B. For fire-rated doors over 20-minute rated provide manufacturer's standard metal light ; frame formed of 0.048 inch thick cold-rolled steel sheet with baked-enamel�or powder- coated finish approved for use in doors of fire rating indicated. _ 2.06 LOUVERS � A. Provide manufacturer's standard solid wood louvers unless otherwise indicated; species shall be the same as door faces. B. Provide metal louvers with vision-proof inverted V or inverted Y blades constructed of galvanized 0.040 inch thick steel factory primed for paint finish with baked-enamel or power-coated finish. C. Provide metal louvers for fire-rated doors with fusible link and closing device listed and rt labeled for use in doors with fire-protection rating of-1 1/2 hours or less. Subject to compliance with rating requirements, louver construction and material shall be the same as non-rated versions. 2.07 FABRICATION i� s A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply with requirements of NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates. � FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08141 -6 � ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Loveland,CO ` t FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. 2. Premachine metal astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire- rated doors. C. Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of referenced standards for kind(s)of door(s) required. 1. Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine installed door frames before hanging doors. 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. For hardware installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." B. Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced qualiry standard and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. C. Align factory fitted doors in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTING A. Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation. C. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08141 -7 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Loveland,CO � FIRST CHAiR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � � t END OF SECTION 08141 � r � � � � k � FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08141 -8 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Loveland,CO X FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 08215— HOLLOW CORE WOOD DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Hollow-core doors with hardboard or MDF faces. 2. Shop priming flush wood doors. 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 9 Section "Interior Painting"for field finishing doors. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings. _. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data. 1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. C. Samples for Verification: 1. Comer sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches, with door faces and edges representing actual materials to be used. D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Mark each door on bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. R 08215- 1 HOLLOW CORE WOOD DOO S OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � ; FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET ` VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 ; 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS .,,� � A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed � and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy � levels during the remainder of the construction period. � 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to ; repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty � period. � � % 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: _ � a. Warping (bow, cup, or finrist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. ` b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a = 3-inch span. � 2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 3. Warranty Period for Hollow-Core Interior poors: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. # � PAR�; 2 -PRODUCTS � ry � 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers � offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Chappell Door Co. 3. Eagle Plywood & Door Manufacturing, Inc. 4. Eggers Industries. 5. Graham; an Assa Abloy Group company. r 6. Marlite. 7. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. 8. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.; a Masonite company. " 9. Oshkosh Architectural Door Company. � 10. VT Industries Inc. S �. 2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL ` f A. Hollow-Core Doors: � 1. Construction: Standard hollow core. `' HOLLOW CORE WOOD DOORS 08215-2 � € OZ Architecture Boulder, CO :' � s f � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking with minimum dimensions as follows: a. 5-by-18-inch lock blocks at both stiles. 2.3 DOORS FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Interior Hollow-Core Doors: 1. Grade: Custom. 2. Faces: Hardboard or MDF. a. Hardboard Faces: AHA A135.4, Class 1 (tempered)or Class 2 (standard). b. MDF Faces: ANSI A208.2, Grade 150 or 160. 3. Exposed Vertical Edges: Any closed-grain hardwood. 4. Construction: Three plies. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates. 2.5 SHOP PRIMING . A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime doors with one coat of wood primer specified in Division 9 Section "Interior Painting". Seal all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with primer. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors. 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. HOLLOW CORE WOOD DOORS 08215-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 3.2 INSTALLATION � A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." ; B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions ' and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated. � C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. � � � 3.3 ADJUSTING # A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. � END OF SECTION 08215 i ¢: � r C: i F. � F k 4 } � { { � � 9' � HOLLOW CORE WOOD DOORS 08215-4 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO s � 5 f � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 08263-SLIDING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes sliding wood-framed glass doors for exterior locations with aluminum- clad exterior exposed surfaces and interior surfaces prepared to receive field- applied stains. B. Related Sections: 3. Division 8 Section "Wood Windows" for related wood-framed transom and sidelight windows and mullions. 4. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware "for hardware not specified in this Section. 5. Division 9 Section "Wood Stains and Transparent Finishes" for on-site finishing of prepared unfinished surfaces of sliding wood-framed glass doors. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide sliding wood-framed glass doors capable of complying with performance requirements indicated based on testing manufacturers' sliding doors that are representative of those specified and that are of test size indicated below: 1. Size indicated on Drawings . B. Structural Performance: Provide sliding wood-framed doors capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing units representative of those indicated for Project that pass AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440, Uniform Load Structural Test: 1. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour at 33 feet above grade, according to ASCE 7, Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings. a. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph . b. Importance Factor: I . c. Exposure Category: B . d. Design Pressure: 30 psf. 3. Deflection Limits: Design glass framing system to limit lateral deflections of glass edges to less than 1/175 of glass-edge length or 3/4 inch, whichever is less, at design pressure based on testing performed according to AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440, Uniform Load Deflection Test, or structural computations. SLIDING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS 08263- 1 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � � , FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 R 1.3 SUBMITTALS � � A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material � descriptions, fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, _ hardware, finishes, and operating instructions. � B. Shop Drawings: For sliding wood-framed glass doors. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other work, operational clearances, and the following: ` �: 1. Mullion details for fenestration combinations including reinforcement and stiffeners. ` 2. Joinery details. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Flashing and drainage details. 5. Weather-stripping details. 6. Glazing details. 7. Accessories. ? C. Samples for Verification: For sliding wood-framed glass doors and components required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1. Main Framing Member: 12-inch- long section with weather stripping, glazing bead and factory-applied color finish. 2. .. Hardware: Full-size units with factory-applied finish. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For sliding wood-framed glass doors indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by � the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation and used to determine the following: 1. Structural test pressures and design pressures from wind loads indicated. 2. Deflection limitations of glass framing systems. . E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer, manufacturer and professional engineer. Y F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed within the � last four years by a qualified testing agency,for each class, grade, and size of sliding wood- framed glass doors. Test results based on use of downsized test doors will not be ` accepted. ` G. Maintenance Data: For finishes, weather stripping, operable panels, and operating hardware to include in maintenance manuals. � H. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. � 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating sliding wood-framed d glass doors that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this perFormance by inclusion in lists and by labels, test reports, and calculations. B. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to sliding door manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. � SLIDING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS 08263-2 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO 4 C FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1. Installer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility including preparation of data for sliding wood- framed glass doors, including Shop Drawings and Designated-Design Submittal, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. C. Source Limitations: Obtain sliding wood-framed glass doors from single source from single manufacturer. D. Fenestration Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440, "Standard/Specification for Windows, Doors, and Unit Skylights," for minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication. Comply with more stringent requirements if indicated. 1. Provide AAMA-certified, sliding wood-framed glass doors with an attached label. E. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, permanently mark safety glass with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. F. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and with GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect sliding doors during transit, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deterioration. Store off ground and covered in a clean, dry, well-ventilated, protected space. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify sliding wood-framed glass door openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace sliding wood-framed glass doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Failure to meet perFormance requirements. b. Structural failures including excessive deflection. c. Water leakage or air infiltration. d. Faulty operation of movable panels and hardware. e. Deterioration of wood, metals, vinyl, other materials, and finishes beyond normal weathering. SLIDING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS 08263-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � k FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 ; f. Deterioration of insulating glass as defined in Division 8 Section "Glazing." � 2. Warranty Period: t a. Sliding Door: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. c. Metal Finish: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of Sierra Pacific Windows or a comparable product by one of the following: _ 1. Aluminum-Clad Sliding Wood-Framed Glass Doors: a. JELD-WEN, Inc. b. Pella. c. Semco. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Wood: Clear fir or pine or another suitable fine-grained lumber; kiln-dried to a moisture � content of 6 to 12 percent at time of fabrication; free of visible finger joints, blue stain, knots, pitch pockets, and surface checks larger than 1/32 inch deep by 2 inches wide; water- repellent preservative treated. B. Aluminum Extrusions and Rolled Aluminum for Cladding: Manufacturer's standard formed sheet or extruded-aluminum cladding, mechanically bonded to exterior exposed virood members. Provide aluminum alloy and temper recommended by sliding wood-framed glass door manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish. £ 1. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 2. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. £ 3. Polyester Finish for Extrusions and Sheet: Manufacturer's standard factory- applied, baked- on high molecular weight polyester (HMP) resin- based paint coating, AAMA 2604. a. Acceptable Product: "Super Dynapon", Valspar Corp. 1) Color and Gloss: Match Architect's sample. C. Clad Trim and Glazing Stops: Material and finish to match clad frame members. D. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive for SC 3 severe service conditions and compatible with � SLIDING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS 08263-4 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 sliding wood-framed glass door members, cladding, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components. 1. Exposed Fasteners: Unless unavoidable for applying hardware, do not use exposed fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of inember or hardware being fastened, as appropriate. E. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 456 or ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. F. Integral Fin: PVC or extruded- or rolled-aluminum nailing fins for securing frame to structure; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. G. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, nickel/chrome-plated steel complying with ASTM B 456 or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. H. Compression-Type Weather Stripping: Provide compressible weather stripping designed for permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action, and completely concealed when sliding wood-framed glass door is closed. �. 1. Weather-Stripping Material: Manufacturer's standard system and materials complying with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440. I. Sliding-Type Weather Stripping: Provide woven-pile weather stripping of wool, polypropylene, or nylon pile and resin-impregnated backing fabric. Comply with AAMA 701. 1. Weather Seals: Provide weather stripping with integral barrier fin or fins of semirigid, polypropylene sheet or polypropylene-coated material. Comply with AAMA 702. J. Drip Caps: Extruded alumic�um, factory fabricated and finished to match aluminum cladding; designed to direct water away from building when installed horizontally at head of aluminum-clad sliding wood-framed glass door units. 2.3 SLIDING DOOR A. AAMA/WDMA/CSA Performance Requirements: Provide sliding wood-framed glass doors of performance indicated that comply with AAMANVDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 unless more stringent performance requirements are indicated. 3. Performance Class: C. B. Thermal Transmittance: Provide sliding wood-framed glass doors with a whole- fenestration-product U-factor maximum indicated, when determined according to NFRC 100. 1. U-Factor: 0.35 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. for aluminum-clad sliding wood-framed glass doors with insulating glass. SLIDING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS 08263-5 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � '; � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 } ti C. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Provide sliding wood-framed glass doors with a � whole-window SHGC maximum of 0.35 , determined according to NFRC 200. � D. Air-Leakage Resistance: Maximum rate not more than indicated when tested according to � AAMANVDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440,Air Leakage Resistance Test. 4 � 1. Maximum Rate: 0.3 cfm/sq.ft. of area at an inward test pressure of 1.57 Ibf/sq. ft.. ` E. Water-Penetration Resistance: No water leakage as defined in AAMA/WDMA/CSA referenced test methods at a water test pressure equaling that indicated, when tested according to AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440, Water Penetration Resistance Test. 1. Test Pressure: 15 percent of positive design pressure, but not less than 6 Ibf/sq.ft nor more than 15 Ibf/sq.ft. G. Forced-Entry Resistance: Comply with Performance Grade 25 requirements when tested according to ASTM F 842. H. Operating Force and Auxiliary (Durability) Tests: Tested according to and complying with � AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440. 2.4 GLAZING ? A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass units and glazing requirements applicable to glazed sliding wood- framed glass door units to the � extent not herein specified. , B. Glass : Clear, insulating-glass units with low-E coating pyrolytic on second surFace or sputtered on second or third surface, complying with Division 8 Section "Glazing", and pressure-equalized (capillary tubes)for anticipated elevations. a. Basis-of-Design Product: Cardinal Glass, LoE2-272. 2. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Manufacturer's standard, in � compliance with performance requirements indicated. 3. Outdoor Lite: Class 1 (clear)float glass. 4. Indoor Lite: Class 1 (clear)float glass. r 5. Visible Light Transmittance: 72 percent minimum. s' 6. Winter Nighttime U-Factor. 0.25 maximum. s 7. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.41 maximum. � 8. Outdoor Visible Reflectance: 11 percent maximum. 9. Spacer: Non- metallic, extruded thermoset polymer structural silicone foam with � k integrally incorporated dessicants and pre-applied adhesive. c C. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces ` weathertight seal. $ � E: � SLIDING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS 08263-6 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET I VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 i I 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Dividers (False Muntins): Provide dividers in designs indicated for each leaf. Provide permanently affixed exterior muntins, between- glass shadow grille, and removable interior grille. 1. Exterior Muntins: Match window exterior frame materials,finishes, and colors. 2. Befinreen- Glass Shadow Grille: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Interior Grille: One-piece removable grille; match window interior frame materials and finishes. 4. Profile: Diamond. 2.6 HARDWARE A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware, fabricated from a corrosion-resistant material compatible with wood and aluminum cladding complying with AAMA 907; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock sliding wood-framed glass doors and sized to accommodate panel weight and dimensions. Do not use aluminum in frictional contact with other metals. Where exposed, provide extruded, cast, or wrought aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel. 1. Hardware Finish: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer's full range . B. Roller Assemblies: Provide movable panels with adjustable-height roller assemblies, complying with AAMA 906, consisting of self-lubricating, dual tandem stainless-steel ball- bearing rollers; finro roller assemblies per panel. C. Threshold and Sill Cap/Track: Provide extruded-aluminum threshold, thermally broken, and track of thickness, dimensions, and profile indicated; designed to comply with performance requirements indicated and to drain to exterior; with manufacturer's standard finish. D. Door Pulls: Provide manufacturer's standard metal pull grips. 1. Hardware Finish: US 26D(brushed chrome). E. Lock: Install manufacturer's keyed cylinder lock, and multipoint locking device on each movable panel, lockable from the inside only. Adjust locking device to allow unobstructed movement of the panel across adjacent panel in the direction indicated. 1. Keying System: All cylinders keyed alike . G. Limit Stops: Resilient rubber. 2.7 INSECT SCREENS A. General: Design sliding doors and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-fitting, removable arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. Fabricate insect screens to fully integrate with door frame. Locate screens on the outside of door and provide for each operable door panel. Comply with SMA 1201. SLIDING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS 08263-7 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � t FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � 2 B. Insect Screen Frames: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum members, with 3' mitered or coped joints, concealed fasteners, adjustable rollers, and removable PVC or PE � spline/anchor concealing edge of inesh. � 1. Finish: Match door panels. � C. Glass-Fiber Mesh Fabric: ASTM D 3656, 18-by-14 or 18-by-16 count per sq. in. mesh of PVGcoated, glass-fiber threads; woven and fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to 3' corrosion, shrinkage, stretch, impact damage, and weather deterioration in the following color: � S { 1. Mesh Color. Charcoal gray . � D. Hardware: Extruded, cast, or wrought aluminum . 1. Lock: Manufacturer's standard pull and keyless locking device on each movable x x panel, lockable from inside only. Adjust locking device to allow unobstructed movement of panel across adjacent panel in direction indicated. � z 2.8 FABRICATION # ; A. Fabricate sliding wood-framed glass doors in sizes indicated. Include a complete system f .. i for assembling components and anchoring windows. B. Fabricate sliding wood-framed glass doors that are reglazable without dismantling panel �` framing. � f £ C. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable panel unless F ° otherwise indicated. � � D. � Factory machine sliding wood-framed glass doors for openings and hardware that is not ` surface applied. ' F E. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the ' factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for � shipment and installation. Allow for scribing, trimming, and fitting at Project site. ; F. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Glaze sliding wood-framed glass doors in the factory. Comply ` with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with AAMA/V1/DMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440. � � 2.9 WOOD FINISHES ` � A. Interior Exposed Wood: Factory prepared to receive field-applied stain. } � � � £ SLIDING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS 08263-8 = 4 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � a- i 6 i � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of threshold substrate, and operational clearances. C. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weathertight sliding door installation. 1. Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction debris. 2. Wood-Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound, well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within 3 inches of opening. 3. Metal Surfaces: Dry and clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, and welding slag; without sharp edges or offsets at joints. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. B. Install sliding doors level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion, warp or rack of frames and panels, or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural . support, and in proper relation to wall flashing, vapor retarders, air barriers, water/weather barriers, and other adjacent construction. C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction. D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials according to ASTM E 2112, Section 5.12 "Dissimilar Materials." 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perForm field tests and inspections. B. Testing Protocol: Should testing and inspecting of representative areas to determine compliance of installed systems with specified requirements take place, do not proceed with installation of subsequent areas until test results for previously completed areas show compliance with requirements. SLIDING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS 08263-9 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 # C. Repair or remove work if test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with � specified requirements. � D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. � E. Sliding wood-framed glass door assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. ` i 1 3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. B. Adjust operating panels and screens to provide a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation,without binding, and weathertight closure. C. Adjust hardware for proper alignment, smooth operation, and proper latching without unnecessary force or excessive clearance. s D. Clean frame surfaces immediately after installing sliding doors. Comply with ` manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. E. Clean glass immediately after installing sliding doors. Comply with manufacturer's written � recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. F. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged = during construction period. � G. Protect sliding door surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. In addition, monitor sliding door surfaces adjacent to and below exterior concrete and masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, ; alkaline deposits, stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact sliding door surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written instructions. H. Refinish or replace sliding doors with damaged finishes. I. Replace damaged components. ; � END OF SECTION 08263 � SLIDING WOOD-FRAMED GLASS DOORS 08263- 10 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 08311 -ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings. B. Related Sections include the following: 3. Division 15 Sections for heating and air-conditioning duct access doors. 1.2 SUBMITTALS B. Product Data: For each type of access door and frame indicated. Include construction details, [fire ratings,] materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes. E. Access Door and Frame Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, including types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation. F. Ceiling Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling- mounted items including access doors and frames, lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, and special trim are shown and coordinated with each other. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain access door(s) and frame(s) through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to access door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per the following test method and that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. NFPA 252 or UL 10B for vertical access doors and frames. 2. ASTM E 119 or UL 263 for horizontal access doors and frames. C. Size Variations: Obtain ArchitecYs acceptance of manufacturer's standard-size units, which may vary slightly from sizes indicated. ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08311 -1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO a � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET = VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � t 1.4 COORDINATION A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work, and indicate in the schedule specified in "Submittals"Article. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.2 STEEL MATERIALS � � C. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc-coated, ASTM A 591/A 591 M with cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), ` exposed. E. Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Surface Preparation for Steel Sheet: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning,"to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying � with SSPGSP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, ' "Pickling." � � 3. Factory-Primed Finish: Apply shop primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. F. Drywall Beads: Edge trim formed from 0.0299-inch zinc-coated steel sheet formed to � : receive joint compound and in size to suit thickness of gypsum board. F 2.5 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS . S B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the ` following: 1. Acudor Products, Inc. 2. Babcock-Davis;A Cierra Products Co. 8. J. L. Industries, Inc. 10. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 12. Milcor Inc. 13. Nystrom, Inc. E. Recessed Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from steel sheet. i � 5 1. Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces. 2. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal in the form of a pan recessed 5/8 inch � for gypsum board infilL r 3. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal with drywall bead for gypsum board ; surfaces . 4. Hinges: Spring-loaded, concealed-pin type or concealed pivoting rod hinge. 5. Latch: Cam latch operated by pinned hex head wrench with irsterior release. `' ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08311 -2 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � f FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 K. Fire-Rated, Insulated, Flush Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from steel sheet. 1. Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces. 2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction . 4. Door: Flush panel with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal with a minimum thickness of 0.036 inch . 5. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal with drywall bead. 6. Hinges: Continuous piano. 7. Automatic Closer: Spring type. 9. Lock: Self-latching device with cylinder lock. 2.7 FABRICATION A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation. B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to rypes of supports indicated. 2. For trimless frames with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum board securely attached to perimeter of frames. 4. Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal or wood framing. 5. Provide mounting holes in frame for attachment of masonry anchors. Furnish adjustable metal masonry anchors. D. Recessed Access Doors: Form face of panel to provide recess for application of applied finish. Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling. E. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed. 1. For cylinder lock,fumish finro keys per lock and key all locks alike. 2. For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device. Fumish plastic grommets and install in holes cut through finish. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames. B. Frames with masonry anchors: Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finish surfaces. ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08311 -3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO ;� �; ;' FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 C. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surFaces or recessed to receive finish material. � 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING z t A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation. B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. i, END OF SECTION 08311 '' � € � ; � � � � � 2 3 � i- i i i t # E � k � � 3 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08311 -4 � } OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � € s i FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 08361 -SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes electrically operated sectional doors. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications"for miscellaneous steel supports. 2. Division 6 Section "Exterior Finish Carpentry"for wood paneling and trim field-applied to sectional overhead doors. 3. Division 11 Section "Parking Control EquipmenY'. 4. Division 16 Sections for electrical service and connections for powered operators and accessories. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Sectional doors shall meet performance requirements specified without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction and without requiring temporary installation of reinforcing components. B. Delegated Design: Design sectional doors, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. C. Structural Performance: Exterior sectional doors shall withstand the effects of gravity loads, � and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7 . 1. Wind Loads: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure)of 30 Ibf/sq. ft., acting inward and oufinrard . 2. Deflection Limits: Design sectional doors to withstand design wind loads without evidencing permanent deformation or disengagement of door components. Deflection of door in horizontal position (open) shall not exceed 1/120 of the door width. 3. Cladding Loads: Additional weight imposed by field-applied wood paneling and trim. D. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate not more than indicated when tested according to ASTM E 283 . 1. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate of 0.08 cfm/sq.ft. at 15 and 25 mph. E. Seismic Performance: Sectional doors shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 . SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08361 - 1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO '� r t � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET ' VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 F. Operation Cycles: Provide sectional door components and operators capable of operating v� for not less than number of cycles indicated for each door. One operation cycle is complete g when a door is opened from the closed position to the fully open position and retumed to the closed position. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and size of sectional door and accessory. Include the following: 1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, � profile door sections,and finishes. 2. Rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories. ; B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special componen�s not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of � size indicated below: 1. Flat Door Sections: 6 inches square. 2. Frame for Paneled Door Sections: 6 inches long of each width of stile and rail required. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For sectional doors indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Summary of forces and loads on miscellaneous steel framing. E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. F. Maintenance Data: For sectional doors to include in maintenance manuals. G. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain sectional doors from single source from single manufacturer. 1. Obtain operators and controls from sectional door manufacturer. � SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08361 -2 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. Standard for Sectional Doors: Fabricate sectional doors to comply with DASMA 102 unless otherwise indicated. E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC/ANSI A117.1. 1.5 WARRANTY B. Special Panel Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace sectional door panels showing evidence of delamination due to defects or failure in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL DOOR SECTIONS A. Exterior Section Faces and Frames: Fabricate from zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet, complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with indicated zinc coating and thickness. 1. Fabricate section faces from single sheets to provide sections not more than 24 inches high and of indicated thickness. Roll horizontal meeting edges to a continuous, interlocking, keyed, rabbeted, shiplap, or tongue-in-groove weathertight seal, with a reinforcing flange return. 2. For insulated doors, provide sections with continuous thermal-br.eak construction, separating the exterior and interior faces of door. B. Section Ends and Intermediate Stiles: Enclose open ends of sections with channel end stiles formed from galvanized-steel sheet not less than 0.064-inch- nominal coated thickness and welded to door section. Provide intermediate stiles formed from not less than 0.064-inch- thick galvanized-steel sheet, cut to door section profile, and welded in place. Space stiles not more than 48 inches apart. C. Reinforce bottom section with a continuous channel or angle conforming to bottom-section profile and allowing installation of astragal. D. Reinforce sections with continuous horizontal and diagonal reinforcement, as required to stiffen door and for wind loading. Provide galvanized-steel bars, struts, trusses, or strip steel, formed to depth and bolted or welded in place. E. Provide reinforcement for hardware attachment. F. Foamed-in-Place Thermal Insulation: Insulate interior of steel sections with door manufacturer's standard CFC free polyurethane insulation, foamed in place to completely fill interior of section and pressure bonded to face sheets to prevent delamination under wind load, and with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08361 -3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 respectively, according to ASTM E 84. Enclose insulation completely within steel sections � that incorporate the following interior facing material,with no exposed insulation: ` 1. Interior Facing Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet,complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with indicated thickness. � G. Fabricate sections so finished door assembly is rigid and aligned, with tight hairfine joints and free of warp,twist, and deformation. 2.2 'TRACKS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES A. Tracks: Manufacturer's standard, galvanized-steel track system of configuration indicated, sized for door size and weight, designed for lift type indicated and clearances shown on Drawings, and complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M for minimum G60 zinc coating. Provide complete track assembly including brackets, bracing, and reinforcement for rigid support of ball-bearing roller guides for required door type and size. Slot vertical sections of track spaced 3 inches apart for door-drop safety device. Slope tracks at proper angle from vertical or design tracks to ensure tight closure at jambs when door unit is closed. B. Track Reinforcement and Supports: Galvanized-steel track reinforcement and support members, complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M and ASTM A 123/A 123M. Secure, reinforce, and support tracks as required for door size and weight to provide strength and rigidity without sag, sway, and vibration during opening and closing of doors. 1. Vertical Track Assembly: Track with continuous reinforcing angle attached to track � and attached to steel support frame. 2. Horizontal Track Assembly: Track with continuous reinforcing angle attached to track ' and supported at points from curve in track to end of track by laterally braced � attachments to overhead steel support frame. ;" 3. Track Acoustical Isolation Mounts: Provide neoprene isolation mounts designed to minimize transfer of door operation sound and vibration from track assembly to . supporting construction. a. Product: Type RBA, Mason Industries, Inc. C. Weatherseals: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping £ gaskets of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene fitted to bottom and top of sectional door ;' unless otherwise indicated. D. Provide weatherstrippinq continuous between iambs and adiacent walls. s � 1. Acceptable Product: Pemko 45137. ' 2 � 2.3 HARDWARE A. General: Provide heavy-duty, corrosion-resistant hardware, with hot-dip galvanized, ; stainless-steel, or other corrosion-resistant fasteners, to suit door type. B. Hinges: Heavy-duty, galvanized-steel hinges of not less than 0.079-inch- nominal coated thickness at each end stile and at each intermediate stile, according to manufacturer's written recommendations for door size. Attach hinges to door sections through stiles and � SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08361 -4 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 rails with bolts and lock nuts or lock washers and nuts. Use rivets or self-tapping fasteners where access to nuts is not possible. Provide double-end hinges where required, for doors over 16 feet wide unless otherwise recommended by door manufacturer. C. Rollers: Heavy-duty rollers with steel ball-bearings in case-hardened steel races, mounted with varying projections to suit slope of track. Extend roller shaft through both hinges where double hinges are required. Provide 3-inch-diameter roller tires for 3-inch-wide track. 2.4 LOCKING DEVICES A. Locking Device Assembly: Fabricate with cylinder lock, spring-loaded deadbolt, operating handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bars to engage through slots in tracks. 1. Lock Cylinders: Provide cytinders standard with manufacturer and keyed to building keying system. 2. Keys: Two for each cylinder. B. Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power-operated doors with safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when door is locked. 2.5 COUNTERBALANCE MECHANISM A. Torsion Spring: Counterbalance mechanism consisting of adjustable-tension torsion springs fabricated from steel-spring wire complying with ASTM A 229/A 229M, mounted on torsion shaft made of steel tube or solid steel. Provide springs designed for number of operation cycles indicated. B. Cable Drums and Shaft for poors: Cast-aluminum or gray-iron casting cable drums mounted on torsion shaft and grooved to receive door-lifting cables as door is raised. Mount counterbalance mechanism with manufacturer's standard ball-bearing brackets at each end of torsion shaft. Provide one additional midpoint bracket for shafts up to 16 feet � long and two additional brackets at one-third points to support shafts more than 16 feet long unless closer spacing is recommended by door manufacturer. C. Cables: Galvanized-steel lifting cables with cable safety factor of at least 5 to 1. D. Cable Safery Device: Include a spring-loaded steel or spring-loaded bronze cam mounted to bottom door roller assembly on each side and designed to automatically stop door if either lifting cable breaks. E. Bracket: Provide anchor support bracket as required to connect stationary end of spring to the wall and to level the shaft and prevent sag. F. Provide a spring bumper at each horizontal track to cushion door at end of opening operation. 2.6 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS A. General: Electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door and "operation cycles" requirement specified, with electric SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08361 -5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO I # � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 , motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-0perated � brake, clutch, remote-control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation. 1. Comply with NFPA 70. ; 2. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6; with NFPA 70, Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V ac or dc. Y B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than number of cycles per hour indicated for each door. C. Door-Operator Type: Unit consisting of electric motor, gears, pulleys, belts, sprockets, chains, and controls needed to operate door and meet required usage classification. 1. Trolley: Trolley operator mounted to miscellaneous steel framing above and to rear of door in raised position and directly connected to door with drawbar. D. Electric Motors: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements specified in Division 11 Section "Common Motor Requirements for EquipmenY' unless otherwise indicated. ;: 1. Electrical Characteristics: � a. Phase: Single phase . } b. Volts: 115 V. c. Hertz: 60. � 2. Motor Type and Controller: Reversible motor and controller (disconnect switch) for motor exposure indicated. _ 1 3. Motor Size: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough to start, � . accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at a speed not less than 8 in./sec. and not more than 12 in.lsec., without exceeding nameplate ratings or � service factor. � 4. Operating Controls, Controllers (Disconnect Switches), Wiring Devices, and Wiring: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated. 5. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors and other electrical devices with building electrical system and each location where installed. � 6. Use adjustable motor-mounting bases for belt-driven operators. � �' E. Limit Switches: Equip each motorized door with adjustable switches inter(ocked with motor controls and set to automaticalty stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions. F. Obstruction Detection Device: Equip motorized door with indicated external automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. Activation of device ` immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. ;: 1. Photoelectric Sensor: Manufacturer's standard system designed to detect an obstruction in door opening without contact between door and obstruction. � a. Self-Monitoring Type: Designed to interface with door operator control circuit to detect damage to or disconnection of sensor device. When self-monitoring = feature is activated, door closes only with sustained pressure on close button. � ` 6 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08361 -6 x OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � ; FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � 2. Sensor Edge: Automatic safety sensor edge, located within astragal or weather stripping mounted to bottom bar. Contact with sensor activates device. Connect to control circuit using manufacturer's standard take-up reel or self-coiling cable. a. Self-Monitoring Type: Four-wire configured device designed to interface with door-operator control circuit to detect damage to or disconnection of sensor edge. H. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip each electrically powered door with capability for emergency manual operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for door operation does not exceed 25 Ibf . I. Emergency Operation Disconnect Device: Equip operator with hand-0perated disconnect mechanism for automatically engaging manual operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount mechanism so it is accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged. J. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency manual operation. 2.7 DOOR ASSEMBLY A. Steel Sectional Door: Sectional door formed with hinged sections. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ThermaSeal STANDARD Series, Raynor , or comparable product by one of the following: a. Clopay Building Products; a Griffon company. b. Overhead Door Corporation. B. Operation Cycles: Not less than 50,000 . C. R-Value: 16.4 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu . D. Steel Sections: Zinc-coated (galvanized)steel sheet with G90zinc coating. 1. Section Thickness: 1-3/4 inches . 2. Exterior-Face, Steel Sheet Thickness: 0.019-inch- nominal coated thickness. a. Surface: Flat. 3. Insulation: Foamed in place. 4. Interior Facing Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet of 0.016-inch- nominal coated thickness. E. Track Configuration: Low-headroom track. F. Weatherseals: Fitted to bottom and top and around entire perimeter of door. Provide combination bottom weatherseal and sensor edge. SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08361 -7 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � " FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � ' VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 G. Windows: Approximately 34 by 16 inches , with square corners, and spaced apart the � > approximate distance as indicated on Drawings; in number of rows and at height indicated on Drawings; instalted with insulated glazing of the following type: � �: 4. Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard . � H. Roller-Tire Material: Case-hardened steel . I. Locking Devices: Equip door with locking device assembly and chain lock keeper. � 1. Locking Device Assembly: Cremone type, both jamb sides, locking bars, operable from inside with thumbturn and outside with cylinder . ; J. Counterbalance Type: Torsion spring . K. Electric Door Operator: 1. Usage Classification: Standard duty, up to 60 cycles per hour. 2. Operator Type: Trolley . 3. Motor Exposure: Interior, clean, and dry . 4. Emergency Manual Operation: Chain type. t 5. Obstruction-Detection Device: Automatic photoelectric sensor and electric sensor edge on bottom bar; self-monitoring types. ' � a. Sensor Edge Bulb Color: Black. � L. Door Finish: ,� ; 1. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coated Finish: Dark Brown. 4 2. Finish of Interior Facing Material: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard selections . 2.8 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the � range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.9 STEEL AND GALVANIZED-STEEL FINISHES A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness. < s` � SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08361 -8 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO z FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine locations of electrical connections. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install sectional doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified. B. Tracks: 1. Fasten vertical track assembly to opening jambs and framing, spaced not more than 24 inches apart. .. 2. Hang horizontal track assembly from structural overhead framing with angles or channel hangers attached to framing by welding or bolting, or both. Provide sway bracing, diagonal bracing, and reinforcement as required for rigid installation of track and door-operating equipment. 3. Install track acoustical isolation mounts at each track support as recommended by manufacturer. 4. Repair galvanized coating on tracks according to ASTM A 780. C. Accessibility: Install sectional doors, switches, and controls along accessible routes in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibiliry. 3.3 STARTUP SERVICES A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perForm startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion. B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer. SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08361 -9 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO .� � �: � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � ' VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 C. Adjust doors and seals to provide weathertight fit around entire perimeter. � � D. Align and adjust motors, pulleys, belts, sprockets, chains, and controls according to manufacturer's written instructions. � E. Touch-up Painting: Immediately after welding galvanized materials, clean welds and � r abraded galvanized surfaces and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. � :; 3.5 DEMONSTRATION , A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain sectional doors. _ END OF SECTION 08361 = r i - � � f � ; � { � � SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08361 -10 ; OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � J a F FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL COLORADO MARCH 4 2010 . , SECTION 08411 -ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 4. Exterior storefront framing for punched openings. 5. Exterior manual-swing entrance doors and door-frame units. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural 8� Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA)Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General PerFormance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction: 1. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. � 3. Failure includes the following: a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movements to glazing. d. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements. e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. f. Sealant failure. g. Failure of operating units. B. Delegated Design: Design aluminum-framed systems, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using perforrnance requirements and design criteria indicated. C. Structural Loads: 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Seismic Loads: As indicated on Drawings. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 - 1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � 4 FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 D. Deflection of Framing Members: � � 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m) and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m) or an amount that restricts edge deflection of � individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is less. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed ; components directly below them to less than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and clearance between members and operable units directly below them to less than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) . E. Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. . 3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not fewer than 10 seconds. F. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.03 Us per sq. m) of fixed wall area when � ; tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 Ibf/sq. � ft. (300 Pa) . < G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according ; to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind- � load design pressure, but not less than 10 Ibf/sq.ft. . �- H. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal movements ` resulting from the following maximum change(range) in ambient and surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. � 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. 2. Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 75 deg F (24 deg C) . I. Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having condensation-resistance factor(CRF) of not less than 74 (frame)and 60(glass)when tested according to AAMA 1503. � J. Thermal Conductance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having an average U-factor of not more than 0.60 when tested according to � AAMA 1503. � � ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS : 08411 -2 � � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO ; � s � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for aluminum- framed systems. B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of moisture in the system to the exterior. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Detail fabrication and assembly of aluminum-framed systems. 2. Inc{ude design calculations. E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. F. Welding certificates. G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for aluminum-framed systems, indicating compliance with perFormance requirements. H. Source quality�ontrol reports. . I. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems to include in maintenance manuals. J. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum-framed systems, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project. C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 -3 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO Z l z FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 i Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more � methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. 1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. D. Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC/ANSI A117.1. �' E. Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer. F. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code -Aluminum." 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. ; 1.7 WARRANTY � A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or � that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. � c. Deterioration of inetals and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. e. Failure of operating components. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Trifab VG 4 451T, Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company, or comparable product by one of the following: 1. United States Aluminum. 2. Vistawall Architectural Products; The Vistawall Group; a Bluescope Steel company. ; ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS � 08411 -4 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO s FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 3. YKK AP America Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Ailoy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M). 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. 5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M. B. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer, complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. 1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011 M. 2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Construction: Thermally broken . 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides . 3. Glazing Plane: As indicated . . B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads,finished to match framing system . D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot�iip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts, complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M. E. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by manufacturer for joint type. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 -5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � a � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 ; � : � € � F. Provide manufacturer's high- perFormance flashing receivers at sills and where elsewhere ` indicated. � 2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS A. Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. ; C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type. � 1. Weatherseal Sealant: ASTM C 920 for Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, A, and O; single-component neutral-curing formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by structural-sealant, weatherseal-sealant, and aluminum-framed-system manufacturers for this use. � 2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing z operation. �� 1. Door Construction: 2- to 2-1/4-inch (50.8- to 57.2-mm) overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile � members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcyng brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. '' � a. Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior. � b. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches � (255 mm)above floor or ground plane. 2. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. � a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door. � B. Entrance Door Hardware: As specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." ; 2.6 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." � f � ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS � 08411 -6 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO f �: � f � ! F FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. -� 6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops. E. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware. 1. At interior doors, provide silencers at•stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install three silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and finro silencers on head of frames for pairs of doors. F. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware. G. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes. H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 -7 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � f, FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 PART 3-EXECUTION � � 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: i 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration. 6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Protection: �� 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by ; painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing � nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. � 2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by �' painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. + � D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and � without warp or rack. E. Install glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." 1. Install weatherseal sealant according to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and ` according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to produce weatherproof joints. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer. F. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. � 1. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. ; G. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"to produce � weathertight installation. � � ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS � € 08411 -8 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � t � i FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the foliowing maximum erection tolerances: 1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.7 m); 1/4 inch (6 mm)over total length. 2. Alignment: a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). B. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference befinreen diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating entrance door hardware to function smoothly as recommended by manufacturer. 1. For entrance doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a 3-second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 3 inches(75 mm)from the latch, measured to the leading door edge. END OF SECTION 08411 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 -9 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO - € r � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � � ; t � � � � $ ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS � 08411 - 10 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 08550 -WOOD WINDOWS PART1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fixed and operable wood-framed windows of the following type: 1. Aluminum clad. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Performance class designations according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS: 1. C: CommerciaL B. Structural Test Pressure: For uniform load structural test, is equivalent to 150 percent of the design pressure. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide wood windows capable of complying with performance requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified, and that are of test size indicated below: 1. Size indicated on Drawings B. Structural Performance: Provide wood windows capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads based on testing units representative of those indicated for Project that pass AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Structural Test: 1. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour at 33 feet above grade, according to ASCE 7, Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings. a. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph . b. Importance Factor: I . c. Exposure Category: B . d. Design Pressure: 30 psf. 2. Deflection: Design glass framing system to limit lateral deflections of glass edges to less than 1/175 of glass-edge length or 3/4 inch, whichever is less, at design pressure based on testing performed according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Deflection Test or structural computations. WOOD WINDOWS 08550-1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � ( u FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET } VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 r � C. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide wood window systems that do not .� evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according � to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 15 percent of positive wind- p load design pressure, but not less than 6.00 Ibf/sq.ft. . 'u � � 1.4 SUBMITTALS � A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods, � dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating `' instructions for each type of wood window indicated. � k B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other work, operational clearances, installation details, and the following: i { � { 1. Mullion details, including reinforcement and stiffeners. , 2. Joinery details. � 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Flashing and drainage details. : 5. Weather-stripping de#ails. � 6. Thermal-break details. ; 7. Glazing details. 8. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional � engineer detailing fabrication and assembly of wood windows and used to determine ; the following: � � a. Structural test pressures and design pressures from basic wind speeds ;: indicated. � b. Deflection limitations of glass framing systems. . � , C. Samples for Verification: For wood windows and components required, prepared on � Samples of size indicated below. ' a 1. Window Comer Fabrication: 12—by-12-inch- long, full-size window comer including � full-size sections of window frame with factory-applied color finish, weather stripping, and glazing. 2. Hardware: Full-size units with factory-applied finish. D. Product Schedule: For wood windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. E. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer and testing agency. � F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed within the � last four years by a qualified testing agency for each rype, class, grade, and size of wood F; window. Test results based on use of downsized test units will not be accepted. t G. Maintenance Data: For operating hardware, weather stripping, and finishes to include in � maintenance manuals. � H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. x WOOD WINDOWS 08550-2 '� OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � t � � � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � •1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to wood window manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. 1. Installer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering senrices needed to assume engineering responsibility. 2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for wood windows, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating wood windows that meet or exceed perFormance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion in lists and by labels, test reports, and calculations. C. Source Limitations: Obtain wood windows through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of wood windows and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." Do not modify size and dimensional requirements. 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. - � E. Fenestration Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, "North American Fenestration Standard Voluntary Performance Specification for Windows, Skylights and Glass Doors," for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated. � 1. Provide AAMA-certified wood windows with an attached label. F. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and with GANA's"Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to wood windows including, but not limited to,the following: 1. Require attendance by installers of windows, cold-formed metal framing, sheathing, flashings,weather- resistive barriers, sealants, and exterior finishes that interface with windows. Require attendance by window manufacturer's representative, contractor, Architect, and other interested parties. 2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 3. Review, discuss, and coordinate the interrelationship of wood windows with other exterior wall components. Include provisions for structural anchorage, glazing, flashing,weeping, sealants,and protection of finishes. 4. Review and discuss the sequence of work required to construct a watertight and weathertight exterior building envelope. WOOD WINDOWS 08550-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 E 5. Inspect and discuss the condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed . � by other trades. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify wood window openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating wood ' windows without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace wood windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. ` 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: ' a. Failure to meet perFormance requirements. b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, or condensation. � c. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. d. Deterioration of wood, metals, vinyl, other materials, and finishes beyond a normal weathering. e. Failure of insulating glass. 2. Warranty Period: a. Window: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. c. Metal Finish: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. d. Labor: 2 years from date of manufacture. } �. - PART2-PRODUCTS � 2.1 MANUFACTURERS ' A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of Sierra Pacific Windows or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Aluminum-Clad Wood Windows: ; a. JELD-WEN, Inc. � c. Pella. d. Semco � WOOD WINDOWS 08550-4 � ' :� OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � 1 3 � . $ FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2.2 MATERIALS A. Wood: Clear ponderosa pine or another suitable fine-grained lumber; kiln dried to a moisture content of 6 to 12 percent at time of fabrication; free of finger joints, blue stain, knots, pitch pockets, and surface checks larger than 1/32 inch deep by 2 inches wide; water-repellent presenrative treated. B. Aluminum Extrusions and Rolled Aluminum for Cladding: Manufacturer's standard formed sheet or extruded-aluminum cladding, mechanically bonded to exterior exposed wood members. Provide aluminum alloy and temper recommended by wood window manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish, but not less than 22,000-psi ultimate tensile strength, and not less than 16,000-psi minimum yield strength. 1. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 2. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. 3. Polyester Finish for Extrusions and Sheet: Manufacturer's standard factory- applied, baked- on high molecular weight polyester (HMP) resin- based paint coating, AAMA 2604. a. Acceptable Product: "Super Dynapon", Valspar Corp. 1) Color and Gloss: Match Architect's sample. C. Trim and Glazing Stops: Unless otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard materials and construction for window specified with finish to match frame members. D. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with wood window members, cladding, trim, hardware,anchors, and other components. 1. Exposed Fasteners: Unless unavoidable for applying hardware, do not use exposed fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of inember or hardware being fastened, as appropriate. E. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. F. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, or nonmagnetic stainless steel, or nickel/chrome-plated steel complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. G. Compression-Type Weather Stripping: Provide compressible weather stripping designed for permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action and for complete concealment when wood window is closed. 1. Weather-Stripping Material: Manufacturer's standard system and materials complying with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS. WOOD WINDOWS 08550-5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO s � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 `' H. Replaceable Weather Seals: Comply with AAMA 701/702. .� 2.3 WINDOWS 3 A. Window Types: As indicated on Drawings . B. AAMA/WDMA Performance Requirements: Provide wood windows of performance indicated that comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS. 1. Performance Class: C. � C. Condensation-Resistance Factor (CRF): Provide wood windows tested for thermal performance according to AAMA 1503, showing a CRF indicated for the following window types:. 1. Casement Windows: Minimum 53. 2. Fixed Windows: Minimum 49. D. Thermal Transmittance: Provide wood windows with a whole-window, U-factor maximum indicated at 15-mph exterior wind velocity and winter condition temperatures when tested according to NFRC 100. 1. U-Factor: 0.35 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F or less. E. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Provide wood windows with a whole-window SHGC � maximum of 0.35, determined according to NFRC 200 procedures. G. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate not more than indicated when tested according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Air Infiltration Test. 1. Maximum Rate: 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. of area at an inward test pressure of 1.57 Ibf/sq.ft. � H. Water Resistance: No water leakage as defined in AAMA/WDMA referenced test methods � at a water test pressure equaling that indicated, when tested according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Water Resistance Test. ; 1. Test Pressure: 15 percent of positive design pressure, but not less than 6 Ibf/sq.ft nor more than 15 Ibf/sq. ft. I. Forced-Entry Resistance: Comply with Performance Grade 10 requirements when tested according to ASTM F 588. J. Operating Force and Auxiliary (Durability) Tests: Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS for operating window types indicated. 2.4 GLAZING A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass units and glazing requirements applicable to glazed wood window units to the extent not herein specified. WOOD WINDOWS 08550-6 � OZ Architecture Boulder,CO k FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 B. Glass : Clear, insulating-glass units with low-E coating pyrolytic on second surface or sputtered on second or third surface, complying with Division 8 Section "Glazing", and pressure-equalized (capillary tubes)for anticipated elevations. a. Basis-of-Design Product: Cardinal Glass, LoE2-272. 2. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Manufacturer's standard, in compliance with performance requirements indicated. 3. Outdoor Lite: Class 1 (clear)float glass. 4. Indoor Lite: Class 1 (clear)float glass. 5. Visible Light Transmittance: 72 percent minimum. 6. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.25 maximum. 7. Solar Heat Gain Coe�cient: 0.41 maximum. 8. Outdoor Visible Reflectance: 11 percent maximum. 9. Spacer: Non- metallic, extruded thermoset polymer structural silicone foam with integrally incorporated dessicants and pre-applied adhesive. C. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertight seal. 2.5 ACCESSORIES � A. Dividers (False Muntins): Provide dividers in designs indicated for each sash lite. Provide 'i permanently affixed exterior muntins, befinreen- glass shadow grille, and removable interior grille. 1. Exterior Muntins: Match window exterior frame materials, finishes, and colors. 2. Befinreen-Glass Shadow Grille: Manufacturer's standard. ' 3. Interior Grille: One-piece removable grille; match window interior frame materials and finishes. 4. Profile: Diamond. � 2.6 HARDWARE A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with wood and aluminum cladding; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock wood windows, and sized to accommodate sash or ventilator weight and dimensions. Do not use aluminum in frictional contact with other metals. Where exposed, provide extruded, cast, or wrought aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel. B. Gear-Type Rotary Operators: Comply with AAMA 901 when tested according to ASTM E 405, Method A. C. Four-or Six-Bar Friction Hinges: Comply with AAMA 904. 1. Locking mechanism and handles for manual operation. 2. Friction Shoes: Provide friction shoes of nylon or other nonabrasive, nonstaining, noncorrosive, durable material. WOOD WINDOWS 08550-7 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO F 3 FIRST CHAtR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2.7 INSECT SCREENS � A. General: Design windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-fitting, removable arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. Fabricate ; insect screens to fully integrate with window frame. Locate screens on inside of window ' and provide for each operable exterior sash or ventilator. _ { B. Aluminum Insect Screen Frames: Manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy complying with i SMA 1004. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped joints or comer extrusions, concealed < fasteners,and removable PVC spline/anchor concealing edge of frame. k 1. Aluminum Tubular Framing Sections and Cross Braces: Roll formed from aluminum ; sheet with minimum wall thickness as required for class indicated. 2. Finish: Baked-on organic coating in color selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. `' C. Glass-Fiber Mesh Fabric: 18-by-14 or 18-by-16 mesh of PVC-coated, glass-fiber threads; woven and fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to corrosion, shrinkage, stretch, impact damage, and weather deterioration; in the following color. Comply with ASTM D 3656. 1. Mesh Color: Charcoal gray . 2.8 FABRICATION � A. Fabricate wood windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling � components and anchoring windows. � B. Fabricate wood windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing. G C. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and ventilator, unless otherwise indicated. . ± D. Factory machine windows for openings and for hardware that is not surface applied. � E. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Except for light sizes in excess of 100 united inches, glaze wood windows in the factory where practical and possible for applications indicated. � Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS. � � ' F. Glazing Stops: Provide nailed or snap-on glazing stops coordinated with Division 8 Section "Glazing"and glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match sash and ventilator �' 4 frames. ' � � G. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the ± factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for ' shipment and installation. Allow for scribing, trimming, and fitting at Project site. � } 2.9 WOOD FINISHES ? C. Interior Exposed Wood: Factory prepared to receive field-applied stain. ? _ � ° WOOD WINDOWS 08550-8 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � i � � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and operational clearances. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weathertight window installation. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction. D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surFaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL . A. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections. B. Testing Protocol: Should testing and inspecting of representative areas to determine compliance of installed systems with specified requirements take place,do not proceed with installation of subsequent areas until test results for previously completed areas show compliance with requirements. C. Repair or remove work if test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be perFormed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. E. Wood window assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. WOOD WINDOWS 08550-9 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO : � � , t � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 ; � 3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION � � � A. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. E Lubricate hardware and moving parts. � � B. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective � coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other � substances. { � C. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with � manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove 3 nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. � € D. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged � ; during construction period. x' � t E. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from �' construction operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below � exterior concrete and masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, ; alkaline deposits, stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact ; window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written � recommendations. .. �' 4 I � END OF SECTION 08550 � � � � � � f t } �: t � {: i $ Z, (g t € Y � � � � � _ � 4 R F $ i$ } 3 � 1 [� t: d' — � S S WOOD WINDOWS 08550 10 � OZ Architecture Boulder,CO k � � � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � SECTION 08710- DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES 1. The work in this section includes furnishing all items of finish hardware as hereinafter specified or obviously necessary for all swinging, sliding, folding and other doors. Except items, which are specifically excluded from this section of the specification or of unique hardware, specified in the same sections as the doors and frames on which they are installed. B. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Related documents, drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specification sections apply to this section. C. RELATED SECTIONS 1. 06200- Finish Carpentry 2. 08110-Metal Doors and Frames 3. 08210-Wood Doors 4. 08410-Entrances and Storefronts 5. Division 16-Access Control 1.02 REFERENCES � A. STANDARDS 1. ANSI-A250.4-Steel Doors and Frames Physical Endurance 2. ANSI A156.1 -Butts and Hinges 3. ANSI A156.2-Bored Locks and Latches 4. ANSI A156.3-Exit Devices 5. ANSI A156.4-Door Controls- Door Closers 6. ANSI A156.5-Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products 7. ANSI A156.6-Architectural Door Trim 8. ANSI A156.7-Template Hinge Dimensions 9. ANSI A156.8-Door Controls-Overhead Holders 10.ANSI A156.13-Mortise Locks and Latches 11.ANSI A156.15-Closer Holder Release Devices 12.ANSI A156.16-Auxiliary Hardware 13.ANSI A156.18-Material and Finishes 14.ANSI A156.26-Continuous Hinges 15.UL10C-Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies DOOR HARDWARE 08710-1 ASSA ABLOY Door Securiry Solutions Loveland,CO :� � �' � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 t B. CODES � ; 1. NFPA 101 —Life Safety Code 2. IBC 2003— International Building Code 3. ANSI A117.1 —Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities 4. ADA—Americans with Disabilities Act r 1.03 SUBMITTALS = ;: A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS � F 1. Submit copies of finish hardware schedule in accordance with Division 1, General Requirements. � B. SCHEDULES AND PRODUCT DATA 1. Schedules to be in vertical format, listing each door opening, and organized into � "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door opening to function as intended. Hardware schedule shall be submitted within � two (2) weeks from date the purchase order is received by the finish hardware � supplier. Furnish four(4) copies of revised schedules after approval for field and file ` use. Note any special mounting instructions or requirements with the hardware _. schedule. Schedules to include the following information: a. Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on drawings, both � on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. � _ b. Handing and degree of swing of each door. c. Door and frame sizes and materials. � d. Keying information. � e. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. f. Elevation drawings and operational descriptions for all electronic openings. g. Name and manufacturer of each hardware item. h. Fastenings and other pertinent information. F i. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols and codes contained in schedule j. Mounting locations for hardware when varies from standard. F 2. Submit catalog cuts and/or product data sheets for all scheduled finish hardware. 3. Submit separate detailed keying schedule for approval indicating clearly how the owner's final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled. C. SAMPLES 1. Upon request, samples of each type of hardware in finish indicated shall be submitted. Samples are to remain undamaged and in working condition through � submittal and review process. Items will be retumed to the supplier or incorporated into the work within limitations of keying coordination requirements. D. TEMPLATES � e. DOOR HARDWARE 08710-2 ASSA ABLOY Door Securiry Solutions Loveland, CO � � � � ; FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1. Furnish a complete list and suitable templates, together with finish hardware schedule to contractor, for distribution to necessary trades supplying materials to be prepped for finish hardware. E. ELECTRONIC HARDWARE SYSTEMS 1. Provide complete wiring diagrams prepared by an authorized factory employee for each opening requiring electronic hardware, except openings where only magnetic hold-open devices are specified. Provide a copy with each hardware schedule submitted after approval. 2. Provide complete operational descriptions of electronic components listed by opening in the hardware submittals. Operational descriptions to detail how each electrical component functions within the opening incorporating all conditions of ingress and egress. Provide a copy with each hardware schedule submitted for approval. 3. Provide elevation drawings of electronic hardware and systems identifying locations of the system components with respect to their placement in the door opening. Provide a copy with each hardware schedule submitted for approval. 4. Prior to installation of electronic hardware, arrange conference befinreen supplier, installers and related trades to review materials; procedures and coordinating related work. 5. The electrical products contained within this specification represent a complete engineered system. If alternate electrical products are submitted, it is the responsibility of the distributor to bear the cost of providing a complete and working system including re-engineering of electrical diagrams and system layout, as well as power supplies, power transfers and all required electrical components. Coordinate with electrical engineer and electrician to ensure that line voltage and low voltage wiring is coordinated to provide a complete and working system. • 6. For each item of electrified hardware specified, provide standardized molex plug connectors to accommodate up to finrelve (12) wires. Molex plug connectors shall plug directly into through-door wiring hamesses, frame wiring harnesses, electric locking devices and power supplies. F. OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 1. Upon completion of construction and building turnover, furnish two (2) complete maintenance manuals to the owner. Manuals to include the following items: a. Approved hardware schedule, catalog cuts and keying schedule. b. Hardware installation and adjustment instructions. c. Manufacturer's written warranty information. d. Wiring diagrams, elevation drawings and operational descriptions for all electronic openings. DOOR HARDWARE 08710-3 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Loveland, CO � � � S FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 ` 1.04 QUAUTY ASSURANCE � � A. SUBSTITUTIONS � { � 1. All substitution requests must be submitted before bidding and within the procedures � and time frame as outlined in Division 1, Genera� Requirements. Approval of products is at the discretion of the architect and his hardware consultant. � B. SUPPLIER QUALIFICATIONS 1. A recognized architectural door hardware supplier who has maintained an office and has been furnishing hardware in the project's vicinity for a period of at least two (2) � years. Hardware supplier shall have office and warehouse facilities to accommodate � this project and must be an authorized factory distributor of all products specified � herein. Hardware supplier shall have in his employment at least one (1)Architectural `' Hardware Consultant (AHC) who is available at reasonable times during business � hours for consultation about the projecYs hardware and requirements to the owner, � architect and contractor. ' f i 1.05 FIRE-RATED OPENINGS 1. Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that comply with NFPA 80 and � requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware � that are listed by Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) or Warnock Hersey (WH) for use ` on types and sizes of doors indicated. � 2. Project requires door assemblies and components that are compliant with positive pressure and S-label requirements. Specifications must be cross-referenced and { coordinated with door manufacturers to ensure that total opening engineering is � compatible with UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door € Assemblies. � a. Hardware required for fire doors shall be listed with Underwriters Laboratories for ratings specified. E b. Certification(s) of compliance shall be made available upon request by the � Authority Having Jurisdiction. � 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING � A. MARKING AND PACKAGING - 1. Properly package and mark items according to the approved hardware schedule, � complete with necessary screws and accessories, instructions and installation ` templates for spotting mortising tools. Contractor shall check deliveries against ; accepted list and provide receipt for them, after which he is responsible for storage � and care.Any shortage or damaged good shall be made without cost to the owner. � 2. Packaging of door hardware is the responsibility of the supplier. As hardware � supplier receives material from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in � containers clearly marked with appropriate hardware set and door numbers to match � § DOOR HARDWARE 08710-4 � ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Loveland,CO �; � k' £ ! t FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 the approved hardware schedule. Two or more identicai sets may be packed in same container. B. DELIVERY 1. The supplier shall deliver all hardware to the project site; direct factory shipments are not allowed unless agreed upon beforehand. Hardware supplier shall coordinate delivery times and schedules with the contractor. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer/contractor until each is satisfied that count is correct. 2. No keys, other than construction master keys and/or temporary keys are to be packed in boxes with the locks. 3. At time of hardware delivery, door openings supplier in conjunction with the contractor shall check in all hardware and set up a hardware storage room. C. STORAGE 1. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable so that completion of work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation. �. 1.07 WARRANTY A. All items, except as noted below, shall be warranted in writing by the manufacturer against failure due to defective materials and workmanship for a minimum period of one (1) year commencing on the date of final completion and acceptance. In the event of product failure, promptly repair or replace item with no additional cost to the owner. 1. Tubular locksets: One(1)Year 2. Mortise locksets: Seven (7)years 3. Exit Devices: Five(5)years 4. Door closers: Ten (10)years 5. Securitron (and approved equals)electrified hardware: Unlimited Lifetime PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Only manufacturers as listed below shall be accepted. Obtain each type of finish hardware (hinges, latch and locksets, exit devices, door closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer. 2.02 MATERIALS A. SCREWS AND FASTENERS DOOR HARDWARE 08710-5 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Loveland,CO � 4 � ¢ � z 5 FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET £ VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � � 1. All required screws shall be supplied as necessary for securing finish hardware in the � appropriate manner. Thru-bolts shall be supplied for exit devices and door closers � where required by code and the appropriate blocking or reinforcing is not present in 4 the door to preclude their use. B. HANGING DEVICES 1. HINGES ` � �. a. Hinges shall conform to ANSI A156.1 and have the number of knuckles as �' > specified, oil-impregnated bearings as specified with NRP (non-removable pin) �' feature, at all exterior reverse bevel doors. Unless otherwise scheduled, supply s one (1) hinge for every 30" of door height. Unless otherwise specified, supply hinges 4 1/2" in height on doors up to 36" and hinges 5" in height on doors over ; 36" and up to 48" in width; heavy weight hinges (.180) shall be supplied at all `` doors where specified. r � ;: 1) Specified Manufacturer: McKinney � 2) Approved Substitutes: Hager, Stanley ; { � 2. PIVOTS � � � a. All pivots shall conform to ANSI 156.4 Grade 1 and shall have oil impregnated ; bronze bearing in the top pivot and a radial roller and thrust bearing in the bottom s pivot. The bottom pivot shall carry the full weight of the door. � ; � 1) Specified Manufacturer: Rixson � 2) Approved Substitutes: NONE � � 3. FLOOR CLOSERS . a. Floor closer shall be of offset hung type and available for labeled, lead lined and ` � regular doors. Floor closer shall have independent and adjustable valves for # closing speed, latch speed, and backcheck. Floor closers shall have a built in dead stop to prevent the door from swinging beyond the opening degree and all shall be of non-hold open type unless specified otherwise. Include top and intermediate pivots per the manufacturer's recommendations. 1) Specified Manufacturer: Rixson (series as specified) 2) Approved Substitutes: NONE C. FLUSH BOLTS AND ACCESSORIES 1. All manual and automatic flush bolts to be furnished as specified. � a. Specified Manufacturer: Rockwood � b. Approved Substitutes: McKinney, Quality, Trimco � D. CYLINDERS AND KEYING € � DOOR HARDWARE 08710-6 � � ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Loveland, CO � � f E ypE t � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1. CYLINDERS a. Provide cvlinders and kevs protected from unauthorized manufacture and distribution bv manufacturer's United States patents. The kev desiqn and tolerances shall permit the cuttinq of kevs with standard code or duplicatinq machines. The repuirement for a sinqle-purpose or kevwav- specific cuttinq or duplicatinq machine shall not be aliowed. The kev desiqn and tolerances shall permit the use of kevs and cvlinders in existinq kev svstems having similar kevwavs and sections. 1) Specified Manufacturer: Schlaae C Kevwav 2) Approved Substitutes: NONE 2. KEYING a. All locks and cvlinders shall be construction master-keved. Ali locks and cviinders to be master-keved or qrandmaster-keved as directed bv the owner. Furnish the followinq kev amounts: 1) Two(2)change keys per lock 2) Three (3)grand master keys 3) Six(6) master keys per master level 4) Fifteen (15)construction/temporary keys b. Master kevs shall be sealed in tamper-proof packaaed boxes when shipped from the factorv. The boxes shall be shrink wrapped and imprinted to ensure the inteqritv of the packaainq. 3. KEY CA$INET a. Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, and tags with self- locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet. Key control cabinet shall expansion capacity of 150%of the number of locks required for the project. 1) Specified Manufacturer: Telkee 2) Approved Substitutes: Lund E. LOCKSETS 1. MORTISE LOCKSETS a. All locksets shall be ANSI 156.13 Series 1000, Grade 1 Certified. All functions shall be manufactured in a single sized case formed from 12 gauge steel minimum. The lockset shall have a field-adjustable, beveled armored front,with a .125" minimum thickness and shall be reversible without opening the lock body. The lockset shall be 2 3/4" backset with a one-piece 3/4" anti-friction stainless steel latchbolt and the deadbolt shall be a full 1" throw made of stainless. All DOOR HARDWARE 08710-7 ASSA ABLOY Door Securiry Solutions Loveland, CO 1 3� � E S j t FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 stnkes shall be non-handed with a curved lip. To insure proper alignment, all trim, � shall be thru-bolted and fully interchangeable between rose and escutcheon designs and shall be the product of one manufacturer. ; 1) Specified Manufacturer: Sargent 8200 Series 2) Approved Substitutes: Corbin Russwin ML2000 Series, Dorma, Schlaqe L9000 Series, Yale 8800 Series 2. CYLINDRICAL LOCKSETS— HEAVY DUTY a. All locksets shall be ANSI 156.2 Series 4000. Grade 1 Certified. Furnish with standard 2 3/4" backset. Lock housinq shall be fabricated of steel zinc dichromate and stainless steel. Latchbolt shall be brass or stainless steel with a minimum 1/2" throw. Locks shall be non-handed and fullv field reversible. 1) Specified Manufacturer: Sarqent 10 Line 2) Approved Substitutes: Corbin Russwin CL3300 Series. Dorma, Schlaqe ND Series, Yale 5400LN Series 3. TUBULAR LOCKSETS a. All locksets shall fit an ANSI standard 161 door prep and shall be usable with 1 � 3/8" or 1 3/4" thick doors. Lever designs shall be available to match other locksets and exit devices. 1) Specified Manufacturer: Sargent DL Series 2) Approved Substitutes: Corbin Russwin TL Series, Dorma, Schlaqe, Yale RL . Series . 4. LOCKSET STRIKES a. Strikes shall be non-handed and available with curved lip, full lip or ASA type strikes as required. Provide strikes with lip-length required to accommodate jamb and/or trim detail and projection. F. EXIT DEVICES 1. CONVENTIONAL DEVICES—PUSH RAIL E a. All exit devices shall be ANSI A156.3, Grade 1 Certified and shall be listed by € Underwriters Laboratories and bear the UL label for life safery in full compliance with NFPA 80 and NFPA 101. Mounting rails shall be formed from a solid single piece of stainless steel, brass or bronze no less than 0.072"thick. Push rails shall ' be constructed of 0.062" thick material. Lever trim shall be available in finishes and designs to match that of the specified locksets. DOOR HARDWARE 08710-8 � ASSA ABLOY Door Securiry Solutions Loveland,CO 'f A Y FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 1) Specified Manufacturer: Sargent 80 Series 2) Approved Substitutes: Corbin Russwin ED4000/ED5000 Series, Von Duprin 35A198 Series,Yale 7100/7200 Series 2. ELECTRIFIED DEVICES a. Electrified exit devices shall conform to all traditional exit device standards as specified above. All power requirements for exit devices used must utilize a continuous circuit electric hinge for clean design and no visible means of interrupting power to device. b. All exit devices, both fire labeled and non-labeled devices, requiring electric dogging shall be held in the "dogged" or retracted position. All exit devices with electric latch retraction shall provide for a remote means of unlocking for momentary or maintained periods of time. c. Exit devices with electrified trim shall be fail-secure unless otherwise specified. 1) Specified Manufacturers: Sargent 2) Approved Manufacturers: Corbin Russwin,Von Duprin, Yale G. DOOR CLOSERS 1. SURFACE MOUNTED CLOSERS— HEAVY DUTY a. All door closers shall be ANSI 156.4, Grade 1 Certified. All closers shall have aluminum alloy bodies, forged steel arms, and separate valves for adjusting backcheck, closing and latching cycles and adjustable spring to provide up to 50% increase in spring power. Closers shall be furnished with parallel arms mounting on all doors opening into corridors or other public spaces and shall be mounted to permit 180 degrees door swing wherever wall conditions permit. � Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install closers on door for optimum aesthetics. Provide drop plates or other accessories as required for proper mounting. 1) Specified Manufacturer: Norton 7500 Series 2) Approved Substitutes: Corbin Russwin DC6000, Sargent 351 Series, Yale 4400 Series H. DOOR TRIM AND PROTECTIVE PLATES 1. Kick plates shall be .050 gauges and two (2) inches less than door width on push side and one (1) inch less than door width on pull side; height as specified in headings. Coordinate and provide width required where possible conflicting hardware dictates otherwise. Push plates, pull plates, door pulls and miscellaneous door trim shall be as shown in the hardware schedule. a. Specified Manufacturer: Rockwood b. Approved Substitutes: McKinney, Quality, Trimco DOOR HARDWARE 08710-9 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Loveland, CO €- � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � � � I. DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS ; _ - 1. WALL MOUNTED DOOR STOPS a. Where a door is indicated on the plans to strike flush against a wall, wall { bumpers shall be provided. Provide convex or concave design as indicated. x 1) Specified Manufacturer: Rockwood 2) Approved Substitutes: McKinney, Quality,Trimco ; � 2. OVERHEAD STOPS/HOLDERS a. Where specified, overhead stops/holders as shown in the hardware sets are to : be provided. Track, slide, arm and jamb bracket shall be constructed of extruded bronze and shock absorber spring shall be of heavy tempered steel. Overhead stops shall be of non-handed design. 1) Specified Manufacturers: Rixson (series as specified) fi 2) Approved Substitutes: Sargent(series as specified) 3. MAGNETIC HOLD-OPENS � a. Magnetic door holders shall meet or exceed ANSI A156.15 and be UL listed 228 for poor Closer and Holders, with or without integral smoke detectors. Holding force shall be 25 to 40 pounds and shall be fail-safe. Pushpin release that � eliminates residual magnetism shall be standard. Provide magnetic hold-0pens � ;.,. with triple-voltage coil that can receive 12 VDC, 24 VAC/DC, or 120VAC; or € coordinate required voltage with electricaL E � 1) Specified Manufacturers: Rixson � � 2) Approved Substitutes: HES, Sargent . �' J. GASKETING AND THRESHOLDS ' z f 1. Provide continuous weatherseal on exterior doors and smoke, light, or sound seals on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide intumescent seals as � required to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily � replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. t 2. Provide threshold units not less than 4" wide, formed to accommodate change in { floor elevation where indicated, fabricated to accommodate door hardware and to fit ; door frames. All threshold units shall comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). a. Specified Manufacturers: Pemko b. Approved Substitutes: McKinney, Reese, Zero �� € � j DOOR HARDWARE 08710- 10 � ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Loveland, CO � � i a � - 4 FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 K. SILENCERS 1. Furnish rubber door silencers all hollow metal frames; finro (2) per pair and three (3) per single door frame. L. ELECTRONIC PRODUCTS AND ACCESSORIES 1. INTEGRATED KEYPAD OPERATED PRODUCTS a. Provide access control products integrated with locks or exit devices as specified in the hardware headings with nonvolatile memory. Provide keypad operated products with a minimum of 100 user codes and a master code to assign emergency, supervisory and user codes. Provide the ability to print the last fifteen entries via infrared printer. Locking and unlocking of the lever handle shall be done by a motor-driven battery powered unit (solenoids not acceptable) contained completely within the body of the cylindrical lock. The inside lever is always free for egress. Provide LED's on unit to indicate status; unlocked and programming mode. 1) Specified Manufacturers: Sargent KP Series 2) Approved Manufacturers:Alarm Lock Trilogy Series 2. POWER SUPPLIES a. Power supplies shall furnish regulated 24VDC and shall be UL class 2 listed. LED's shall monitor zone status (voltage/no voltage) and slide switches shall be provided to connect or disconnect the load from power; 1, 4 or 8 separate output circuit breakers shall be provided to divide the load. Power supplies shall have the internal capability of charging optional 24VDC sealed lead acid batteries in addition to operating the DC load. Power supplies shall be supplied complete requiring only 120VAC to the fused input and shall be supplied in an enclosure. Power supplies sfiall be provided with emergency release terminals that allow the release of all devices upon activation of the fire alarm system. 1) Specified Manufacturer: Securitron BPS 2) Approved Substitutes: Folger Adams 2.03 FINISHES A. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are those listed in ANSI/BHMA A156.18 or traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products. B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware. C. Where specified hardware shall have an antimicrobial coating which permanently suppresses the growth of bacteria, algae, fungus, mold and mildew applied. The finish DOOR HARDWARE 08710- 11 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Loveland,CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET j: VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � shall control the spread and growth of bacteria, mold and mildew and shall be FDA listed ; for use in medical and food preparation equipment. j. PART 3—EXECUTION ' � }: � 3.01 EXAMINATION F A. Contractor shall ensure that the building is secured and free from weather elements prior ' to installing interior door hardware. Examine hardware before installation to ensure it is � free of defects. k 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in the following applicable publications, except < as specifically indicated or required to comply with the governing regulations. f 1. "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and � Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute(DHI.) � 2. WDMA Industry Standard I.S.1.7, "Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors." ; .. � f 3. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops are to be located. r � ; B. All hardware shall be applied and installed in accordance with best trade practice by an � experienced hardware installer. Care shall be exercised not to mar or damage adjacent � work. C. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into . surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, ` storage, and reinstallation or application of surFace protection with finishing work ; specified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved. D. Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. � Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the r work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation. 5 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The manufacturer's representative shall do a final inspection prior to building completion to ensure that all hardware was correctly installed and is in proper working order. 3.04 ADJUSTING, CLEANING,AND DEMONSTRATING £ A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper � operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate � freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made. � DOOR HARDWARE 08710-12 5�,� � ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Loveland,CO � � � E � P , f FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 B. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make final check and adjustment of a�l hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore to proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. C. Instruct owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware finishes and usage of any electronic devices. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Contractor shall protect all hardware, as it is stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame. �.06 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. The following schedule is furnished for whatever assistance it may afford the Contractor; do not consider it as entirely inclusive. Should any particular door or item be omitted in any scheduled hardware heading, provide door or item with hardware same as required for similar purposes. Hardware supplier is responsible for handing and sizing all products as listed in the hardware heading. Quantities listed are for each pair of doors, or for each single door. B. Manufacturer's Abbreviations: 1. BO— By Others 2. MC— McKinney 3. NO— Norton 4. PE—Pemko • 5. RO— Rockwood 6. RX— Rixson 7. SA—Sargent 8. SN—Securitron DOOR HARDWARE 08710-13 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Loveland, CO � ; � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET E VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 x' � Headinq 1 A � Doors: 101 A ° t 2 Floor Closer SC 27 NHO 90 DEG 3/4" OS CWF 626 RX T 1 Side Pivot M19 626 RX 1 Electric Side Pivot EM19 QC 626 RX � 1 Exit Device(Exit Only) 8410 F 32D SA 1 Electrified Exit Device SC 56 8410 F 106 X 862 32D SA 2 Overhead Stop 1-036 630 RX � 1 Threshold PH 3 X 700(PR) AL RX 1 Weatherstrip Door Manufacturers Standard BO s 2 Door Bottom Door Manufacturers Standard BO 2 Meeting Stile Door Manufacturers Standard BO 1 Card Reader By Security Contractor BO e ; 1 Power Supply BPS-24 SN 1 ElectroLynx Hamess QC-0003P MC 1 ElectroLynx Hamess QC-C1500P MC OPERATION: Doors normally closed and locked. Access by authorized use of card reader or by � key override. Doors always have free egress. Headinq 2.0 �� Doors: 102C, 1056, 110B � s 2 Hinges TA386 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 32D MC rv 1 Electric Hinge TA386 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 QC 32D MC ' 1 Electrified Exit Device SC 56 12 8804 F FSW 32D SA . 1 Closer CLP-7500 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10"X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO = 1 Threshold 272A L.A.R. PE 1 Weatherstrip 303APK @ Head &Jambs PE 1 Door Sweep 345AV L.A.R. PE 1 Card Reader By Securiry Contractor BO 1 Power Supply BPS-24 SN 1 ElectroLynx Hamess QC-0003P MC 1 ElectroLynx Hamess QC-C1500P MC OPERATION: Door normally closed and locked. Access by authorized use of card reader or by key override. Door always has free egress. HeadinQ 3.0 Doors: 101 B, 105A, 110A 3 Hinges TA786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D MC 1 Exit Device(Passage) 12 8815 F ETL 32D SA 1 Closer 7500 REG/PA 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K105010"X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO DOOR HARDWARE 08710- 14 � ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Loveland,CO ,; FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 1 Wall Stop 403 US26D RO 1 Threshold 272A L.A.R. PE 1 Weatherstrip 303APK @ Head 8� Jambs PE 1 Door Sweep 315CN L.A.R. PE Headinq 4.0 Doors: 218 3 Hinges TA314 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D MC 1 Keypad Lockset SC 28 KP10G77 LL 26D SA 1 Closer 7500 REG/PA 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10"X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 403 US26D RO 1 Threshold �72A L.A.R. PE 1 Weatherstrip 303APK @ Head & Jambs PE 1 Door Sweep 315CN L.A.R. PE Headinp 5.0 Doors: 108 3 Hinges TA786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 26D MC 1 Exit Device (Storeroom) SC 12 8804 F ETL 32D SA 1 Closer CLP-7500 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10"X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Gasketing S88D @ Head & Jambs PE Headinq 6.0 Doors: 113, 213, 214, 313, 314, 413, 414, 513, 514 3 Hinges TA786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D MC 1 Exit Device (Passage) 12 8815 F ETL 32D SA 1 Closer 7500 REG/PA 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10"X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 403 US26D RO 1 Gasketing S88D @�Head 8� Jambs PE Headinq 7.0 Doors: 114" 3 Hinges TA786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D MC 1 Exit Device (Passage) 12 8815 F ETL 32D SA 1 Closer CLP-7500 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10"X 2" L.D.W. 46E CSK US32D RO 1 Gasketing S88D @ Head &Jambs PE DOOR HARDWARE 08710- 15 ASSA ABLOY Door Securiry Solutions Loveland, CO � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � Headinq 8.0 Doors: 103, 111 3 Hinges TA714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 26D MC 1 Storeroom Lockset SC 28 10G04 LL 26D SA 1 Closer 7500 REG/PA 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10"X 2"L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 403 US26D RO 1 Gasketing S88D @ Head &Jambs PE HeadinQ 9.0 � ; Doors: 104, 107, 109A, 109B 3 Hinges TA714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 26D MC 1 Storeroom Lockset SC 28 10G04 LL 26D SA 1 Closer CLP-7500 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10"X 2"L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Gasketing S88D @ Head &Jambs PE ; Headin4 10A � Doors: 302A � �: 3 Hinges TA714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D MC � 1 Storeroom Lockset SC 28 10G04 LL 26D SA ' 1 Closer 7500 REG X 77860H X 7377-0111 689 NO � 1 Kick Plate K1050 10"X 2"L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Overhead Stop . 1-036 630 RX � f Headinq 11.0 Doors:419 � 3 Hinges TA714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 26D MC � 1 Storeroom Lockset SC 28 10G04 LL 26D SA 1 Closer 7500 REG/PA 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10"X 2"L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Overhead Stop 1-036 630 RX i' Headina 12A � ¢ Doors: 216, 316, 416, 516 � 3 Hinges TA714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 26D MC 1 Storeroom Lockset SC 28 10G04 LL 26D SA 1 Closer 7500 PA X 2018S 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10"X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO � 1 Overhead Stop 9-036 630 RX � DOOR HARDWARE 08710-16 � � ASSA ABLOY Door Securiry Solutions Loveland,CO � � � i � � � ( i FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1 Gasketing S88D @ Head &Jambs PE Headinq 13.0 Doors: 203 3 Hinges TA714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D MC 1 Keypad Lockset SC 28 KP10G77 LL 26D SA 1 Cioser 7500 REGlPA 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10"X 2" L.D.W. 46E CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 403 US26D RO 1 Gasketing S88D @ Head &Jambs PE Headinq 14.0 Doors: 303,403, 503 3 Hinges TA714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D MC 1 Passage Set 28 10U15 LL 26D SA 1 Closer 7500 REG/PA 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10"X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 403 US26D RO 1 Gasketing S88D @ Head & Jambs PE Headinq 15.0 Doors: 106 3 Hinges TA714 5 X 4 1/2 26D MC 1 Passage Set 2810U15 LL 26D SA 1 Closer 7500 REG/PA 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10"X 2" L.D.W.4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 403 US26D RO 1 Gasketing S88D @ Head & Jambs PE HeadinQ 16.0 Doors: 202,302, 402, 502 3 Hinges TA714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D MC 1 Passage Set 28 10U15 LL 26D SA 1 Closer 7500 REG/PA 689 NO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10"X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Mop Plate K1050 6"X 1" L.D.W. 46E CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 403 US26D RO 1 Gasketing S88D @ Head & Jambs PE DOOR HARDWARE 08710- 17 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Loveland, CO E FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � � ; HeadinQ 17.0 Doors: 215, 315, 415, 515 4 Pocket Pivot F519 626 RX ' 1 Passage Set 28 10U15 LL 26D SA 1 Closer 7500 ST 689 NO 1 Kick Piate K1050 10"X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Magnetic Holder 998 689 RX 1 Gasketing S88D @ Head & Jambs PE Headinq 18.0 Doors: 204, 205, 206, 207, 208, 209, 210, 211, 211 A, 304, 305, 306, 307, 308, 309, 310, 311, 404, 405, 406, 407, 408,409, 410, 411, 504, 505, 506, 507, 508, 509, 510, 511 1 Hinges TA714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D MC 2 Spring Hinges 1502 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D MC 1 Dormitory Lockset SC 8225 LL 26D SA ` 1 Kick Plate K1050 10"X 2" L.D.W. 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Door Stop 505 (As Required) US26D RO 1 Smoke Seal S44D @ Head 8�Jambs PE 1 Door Guard 604 US26D RO � 1 Door Viewer 622 US15 RO �� Headinq 19A � DoQrs: UNIT BEDROOMS 3 Hinges TA714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D MC 1 Dead Bolt SC 485 26D SA 1 Passage Set DLU15 TOL 26D SA 1 Door Stop 505(As Required) US26D RO 4 Headina 20.0 Doors: UNIT BATHROOMS 3 Hinges T714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D MC � 1 Privacy Set DLU65 TOL 26D SA 1 Door Stop 505 (As Required) US26D RO � > 4 � f DOOR HARDWARE 08710- 18 � ASSA ABLOY Door Securiry Solutions Loveland,CO � � � � � r � i FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 Headin 21.0 Doors: UNIT PANTRIES 3 Hinges TA714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 26D MC 1 Passage Set DLU15 TOL 26D SA 1 Door Stop 505 (As Required) US26D RO Headinq Misc-1 Doors: 102B 1 Hardware By Door Supplier BO DOOR HARDWARE 08710-19 ASSA ABLOY Door Security Solutions Loveland,CO a � # z: ' FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � END OF SECTION 08710 ; � s � � ;: F $ DOOR HARDWARE 08710-20 � ASSA ABLOY Door Securiry Solutions Loveland, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 08800-GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Windows. 2. Doors. 4. Glazed entrances. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Manufacturers of Glass Products: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036. � C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified gas. D. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. • Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating. E. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surFaces of glass. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not GLAZING 08800- 1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO — v � � � £ � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 �' 4. } A less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or � � exceed the following criteria: ` � € 1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300, � according to the following requirements: � � b. Specified Design Wind Loads: As indicated, but not less than wind loads ¢ applicable to Project as required by ASCE 7 "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 6.0 "Wind Loads." s e. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set ; � vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action. � 1) Load Duration: 60 seconds or less . � ; g. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For the following types of glass supported on all 4 � edges, provide thickness required that limits center deflection at design wind � pressure to 1/50 times the short side length or 1 inch,whichever is less. ` � 1) For monolithic-glass lites heat treated to resist wind loads. a 2) For insulating glass. � � h. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm. � . x C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the � 7 following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface � � temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. � € 1. Temperature Change(Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. � E D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties � specified based on manufacturer's published test data, as d�termined according to � procedures indicated below: 7 ; 1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick . € 3. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for � overall unit and for each lite. �' 4. Center-of-Glass Values: Based on using LBL-44789 WINDOW 5.0 computer � program for the following methodologies: r x � a. U-Factors: NFRC 100 expressed as Btu/sq.ft. x h x deg F. ? b. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200. � c. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300. } t 1.4 SUBMITTALS � � � z B. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. ¢ � D. Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12-inch-square Samples for glass. � 7. Fire-resistive qlazinq products. � f - GLAZING 08800-2 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � a i � € � E � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 9. Insulating glass for each designation indicated. 10. For each color(except black)of exposed glazing sealant indicated. E. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. I ��I F. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products fumished comply with requirements. 1. For low-e-coated glass, provide documentation demonstrating that manufacturer of coated glass is certified by coating manufacturer. G. Qualification Data: For installers. H. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report: From glazing sealant manufacturer indicating glazing sealants were tested for adhesion to glass and glazing channel substrates and for compatibility with glass and other glazing materials. I. Product Test Reports: For each of the following types of glazing products: 2. Coated float glass. 3. Insulating glass. 4. Glazing sealants. J. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain the following through one source from a single manufacturer for each glass type: insulating glass. D. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories through one source from a single manufacturer for each product and installation method indicated. E. Glass Product Testing: Obtain glass test results for product test reports in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing glass products. 1. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. F. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Testing: Obtain sealant test results for product test reports in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-month period. GLAZING 08800-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � r � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � � 1. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified v� � according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented ` according to ASTM E 548. 2. Test elastomeric glazing sealants for compliance with requirements specified by t reference to ASTM C 920, and where applicable,to other standard test methods. � ; G. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Submit to elastomeric glazing sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of each glazing material type, tape � sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member that will contact or affect 4 elastomeric glazing sealants: 1. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation �' techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass,tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates. � 2. Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. ; 3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. ` t 4. For materials failing tests, obtain sealant manufacturer's written instructions for ` corrective measures, including the use of specially formulated primers. 5. Testing will not be required if elastomeric glazing sealant manufacturers submit data based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and � compatibility with, glazing materials matching those submitted. � H. Glazing for Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Glazing for assemblies that comply with NFPA 80 � ; and that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities ' having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. € 1. Glazinq for Fire-Rated Window Assemblies• Glazinq for assemblies that comply with ; NFPA 80 and that are listed and labeled bv a testinQ and inspectinq aqency . acceatable to authorities havina iurisdiction for �re ratinqs indicated based on � testina accordinq to NFPA 257. � f J. Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, obtain safety glazing products permanently marked with certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Where glazing units, including Kind FT glass and laminated glass, are specified in Part 2 articles for glazing lites more than 9 sq. ft. in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with Category II materials, for lites 9 sq. ft. or E' less in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with Category I or II materials, except for hazardous locations where Category II materials are required by 16 CFR 1201 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. K. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product z manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. GLAZING � ` 08800-4 € OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1. GANA Pubiications: GANA's"Glazing Manual." 4. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units." L. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following testing and inspecting agency: 1. Insulating Glass Certification Council. 2. Associated Laboratories, Inc. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. For insulating-glass units that will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid hermetic seal ruptures. 1.7. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain,frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F. . 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by coated-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site,within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by insulating-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace insulating- glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion. , � � GLAZING 08800-5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET ' VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 ; ;: ' PART2 - PRODUCTS � ` � i: s 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to x product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products � specified. ` 3. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product specified. � 4. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers � offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited � to, manufacturers specified. `: 5. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of ` the manufacturers specified. � 6. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each glazing product is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified. ; f: 2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3; of class � indicated. ' � �: B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality-Q3; of class, kind, and condition indicated. � 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion � parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed float glass � where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual r glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements"Article. 3. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 4. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other uncoated glass). � � 5. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed or Kind HS (heat- _ strengthened) float glass where safety glass is indicated, or if not indicated, as � � required by authorities having jurisdiction. _ � E. Pyrolytic-Coated Float Glass: ASTM C 1376, float glass with metallic-oxide coating applied � by pyrolytic deposition process during initial manufacture, and complying with other = requirements specified. g F. Sputter-Coated Float Glass: ASTM C 1376, float glass with metallic-oxide or -nitride � coating deposited by vacuum deposition process after manufacture and heat treatment (if = any), and complying with other requirements specified. € GLAZING 08800-6 � � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � i � � � f 1 � � , � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 M. Insulating-Glass Units, General: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and with requirements specified in this Article and in Part 2 "Insulating-Glass Units" Article. 1. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements"Article. 2. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) glass lites where safety glass is indicated or, if not indicated, as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated for insulating-glass units are nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are measured perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass lites at uniYs edge. 4. Sealing System: Dual seal, with primary and secondary sealants as follows: a. Manufacturer's standard sealants. 5. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. a. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both. b. Corner Construction: Manufacturer's standard comer construction. 2.4 FIRE-RATED GLAZING PRODUCTS A. Film-Faced Safetv- Rated Wire Glass: ProprietarV CateqorV II safety qlazinq product in the form of 1/4inch- thick wire qlass , faced on one surface with a clear qlazinq . film and as follows. - 1. Fire Protection Ratinq: As indicated for the assemblv in which qlazinq material is installed, and qermanentiv labeled by a testinq and inspectinq aqency acceptable to authorities havinq iurisdiction. • 2. Product: "VUireLite NT" bv Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd., and distributed by Technical Glass Products. 2.5 GLAZING GASKETS A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below, complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 1. EPDM, ASTM C 864. 2. Silicone, ASTM C 1115. 3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber, ASTM C 1115. 4. Any material indicated above. B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned gaskets of material indicated below; complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: GLAZING 08800-7 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 1. EPDM. � ' 3' 2. Silicone. � � 3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber. { 4. Any material indicated above. � ; 2.6 GLAZING SEALANTS �' � A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements: 1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass { units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as � demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. � 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for � selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions �: existing at time of installation. � 3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's � full range. � � B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated � for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. � t: 1. Neutral-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealants : � � � a. Available Products: � � � 1) Dow Corning Corporation; 795. ,2) GE Silicones; SilPruf NB SCS9000. k 3) Pecora Corporation; 895. � ; b. Type and Grade: S (single component)and NS (nonsag). � c. Class: 50. d. Use Related to Exposure: NT(nontra�c). e. Uses Related to Glazing Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to glazing ' substrates indicated, O. � � €: 1) Use O Glazing Substrates: Coated glass; aluminum coated with a high- � perFormance coating . � � � f. Applications � � 2) As cap, toe, and heel beads in non-structural glazing applications. ; s C. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Resistive Glazing Products: Identical to products used in test "` � assemblies to obtain fire-protection rating. � t � ; � � � GLAZING 08800-8 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO ; � � � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 2.7 GLAZING TAPES A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS �� A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Identical to product used in test assembly to obtain fire-resistance rating. GLAZING 08800-9 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2.10 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS � A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. Y 2.11 MONOLITHIC FLOAT-G�ASS UNITS A. Uncoated Clear Float-Glass Units : Class 1 (clear)float glass. 1. Thickness: 6.0 mm. 2.16 CONVENTIONAL LOW-EMISSIVITY INSULATING-GLASS UNITS A. Clear Low-E Insulating-Glass Units : 1. Basis-of-Design Product: PPG; Solarban 60, or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Guardian Industries. b. Pilkington. c. Viracon. 2. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 25 and 6.0 mm, unless otherwise � indicated. �- 3. Interspace Content: Air. a. Kind HS (heat strengthened); Kind FT (fully tempered) where indicated and required by authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic or sputtered on second or third surface. ` 5. Visible Light Transmittance: 70 percent minimum. 6. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.29 maximum. 7. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.28 maximum. 8. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.38 maximum. 9. Outdoor Visible Reflectance: 11 percent maximum. 10. Shading Coefficient: 0.44 maximum. A. EXECUTION �� f 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing glazing,with Installer present,for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. � ; GLAZING 08800-10 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO E FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair .. performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing. E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of I . compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches as follows: 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system perFormance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattem, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. GLAZING 08800-11 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO I :3 �; :� FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or � gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when � installation is subjected to movement. ; � K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at comers and install gaskets in a manner : � recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 3.4 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. � C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. k Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not f lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. _ � E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed. t � F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. � _ f G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting <: dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of � removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. s . , t H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly,with allowance for stretch during installation. � B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in ' � place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place � against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. ;: GLAZING 08800-12 � OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � � � � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � 3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) . . . . . . A. Install contmuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between lass lites and lazin sto s to maintain lass face clearances and to revent sealant from 9 9 9 P 9 P extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surFaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. � C. Examine glass surFaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both exposed surFaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION 08800 � GLAZING 08800- 13 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO .t �. 4 FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 y � � f i �- s' E i # b i � � } 4 t _ S: � Y � L � � �q } l f E � r !. E 2 � � � P ff�� t �p f � F t S € � � S Ej $ � � #: GLAZING 08800- 14 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO 7 � � i i k FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 09111 - NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications: 2. Interior furring systems(e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.). B. Related Sections include the following: 2. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry"for wood wall, floor, and ceiling framing. 4. Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for head-of-wall joint systems installed with wood framing. 6. Division 9 Section "Portland Cement Plaster" for metal lath supported by wood framing. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and eonstruction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 - 1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � t; FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � � + r' � 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Select steel studs in accordance with the manufacturer's standard load tables and the following Design Pressures and Maximum Deflections: � � . . . �� ; ; N � � Interior Soffits and Bulkheads 5 PSF U360 Notes: ; 1. Where elements meet multiple conditions;Use most stringent Defledion and Design Pressure values. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.2 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless � otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 , hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise : indicated. �' � E ; � � � E NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 -2 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO € �: 3. � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 3. Conversion of Gage to Minimum Thickness for Metal Framing: When metal framing is indicated to be of a specific gage thickness, the following shall be the thickness for the uncoated base metal according to SSMA"Product Technical Information". Gage Design Thickness (inches) Minimum Thickness (mils) 25 0.0188 18 22 0.0283 27 20 0.0312 30 18 0.0451 43 16 0.0566 54 14 0.0713 68 12 0.1017 97 Minimum thickness represents 95 percent of the design thickness and is the minimum acceptable thickness of material for the Work. 2.3 FURRING CHANNELS G. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep, 1 '/4-inch top width, 2'/2- inch bottom width. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0188 inch . 2.5 RESILIENT FURRING SYSTEM B. Furring Channels: 1. Configuration: Asymmetrical. � 2. Product: "RC Deluxe", DietrPch Metal Framing. C. Isolation Clips: Slip- on steel sheet members designed to facilitate proper installation and performance of furring channels. 1. Product: "RC Assurance", Keene Building Products. D. Accessories: 1. Isolation Strip: Flexible, flame- resistant polymer- core fabric designed to reduce transference of flanking noise in gypsum board wall/ceiling interface. a. Product: "Space Assurance", Keene Building Products. E. Locations: Living unit ceilings and where otherwise indicated. NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 -3 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET ` VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � � � ' � . ` 2.6 SOUND ISOLATORS � � A. Isolator Clip: Galvanized steel furring clip that incorporates a rubber isolator pad to provide acoustic decoupling between furring strips and supporting framing. � x � 1. Product: "RSIC-1 Resilient Sound Isolation Clip", PAC International, Inc. � � B. Locations: Living unit/corridor demising partitions and where othenroise indicated. ; x ; 2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. � � 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding � power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. �' � F � PART 3 - EXECUTION �. � � � 3.1 EXAMINATION � > A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welcled hollow-metal � frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other s conditions affecting performance. � � � 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. : � � 3.2 PREPARATION � � B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: Coordinate with non-load-bearing steel � framing so both elements of Work remain complete and undamaged. Patch or replace � sprayed fire-resistive materials removed or damaged during installation of non-load-bearing $ steel framing to comply with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Sprayed Fire- � Resistive Materials." � x 2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent ` necessary for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness ; of fire-resistive materials below that required for fire-resistance ratings indicated. _ Protect adjacent fire-resistive materials from damage. � � k 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL � A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing � indicated. � 4. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that { apply to framing installation. � � � ;: NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 -4 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � � 4 [ ( FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � a. Com i with manufacturer's installation recommendations for sound isolation/ PY control assemblies D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.5 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES D. Direct Furring: 1. Screw to wood framing. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. END OF SECTION 09111 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 -5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � 4 k FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � i � { ¢ � €; � . � r � � � ; t t f € � � t � � � � �: F {. � � F t E � � � i s. � � # � F � S F r t �. i � F e € ; S f t � R £ � B � � � NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 -6 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO i � � i � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 09220 -PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior portland cement plasterwork(stucco) on metal lath plaster bases. B. Related Sections include the following: 3. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry' for wood framing supporting lath and Portland cement plaster. 4. Division 6 Section "Sheathing"for weather- resistive building paper. 5. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"for sealants installed with exterior portland cement plaster(stucco). 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and installation of control and expansion joints including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of factory-prepared finish coat indicated; 12 by 12 inches, and prepared on rigid backing. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Before plastering, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Install mockups for each type of finish indicated. 2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction tra�c, and other causes. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220-1 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � S' � 9 FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET c VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 e � f 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS � A. Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements. ; B. Exterior Plasterwork: ` 4' 1. Apply and cure plaster to prevent plaster drying out during curing period. Use � procedures required by climatic conditions, including moist curing, providing : coverings, and providing barriers to deflect sunlight and wind. a 2. Apply plaster when ambient temperature is greater than 40 deg F. � 3. Protect plaster coats from freezing for not less than 48 hours after set of plaster coat has occurred. � i: r t PART 2- PRODUCTS t 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be � incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers � offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited �: to, manufacturers specified. #: 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. . ; t: 2.2 NONSTRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING MEMBERS, GENERAL ' A. Components, General: Comply with ASTM C 1063. For steel sheet components not included in ASTM C 1063, comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated. � B. Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, not less than 0.0475-inch 3 diameter, unless otherwise indicated. ' � 2.3 METAL LATH ; A. Expanded-Metal Lath: ASTM C 847 with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot�lip galvanized ` zinc coating. � _ 1. Manufacturers: � � a. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation (AMICO). b. Califomia Expanded Metal Products Company(CEMCO). � c. Dietrich Industries, Inc. � _ � PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220-2 = OZ Architecture Boulder, CO i p A FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 d. Western Metal Lath &Steel Framing Systems. 2. Diamond-Mesh Lath: Self-furring. a. Weight: 3.4 Ib/sq. yd. 2.4 WEATHER- RESISTIVE BARRIER A. Reference Division 6 Section"Sheathing". 1. Provide at all plaster. 2. Install in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1063 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required. B. Zinc and Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)Accessories: 1. Manufacturers: a. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation (AMICO). b. Califomia Expanded Metal Products Company(CEMCO). c. Dietrich Industries, Inc. d. Westem Metal Lath 8 Steel Framing Systems. 2. Foundation Weep Screed: Fabricated from hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 zinc coating. . 3. External-Corner Reinforcement: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 4. Comerbeads: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized)steel. a. Small nose cornerbead with expanded flanges; use unless otherwise indicated. C. Aluminum Accessories: 1. Reveal at Window Perimeters: "F"F-laste�Reveal Molding, Fry Reglet; no vent slots; a--�--'/<-inch-wide reveal; color as selected from manufacturer's standards. 2. Control Joint: "Plaster Channel Screed", Fry Reglet; no vent slots; 3/4-inch-wide �2 reveal; color as selected from manufacturer's standards. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Water for Mixing: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories. B. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch long, free of contaminants, manufactured for use in portland cement plaster. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � D. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: Complying with ASTM C 1063. � a; � 2.7 PLASTER MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. t B. Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S; or ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897. D. Acrylic-Based Finish Coatings: Factory-mixed 100 percent acrylic- emulsion coating systems, formulated with colorfast mineral pigments and fine aggregates; for use over portland cement plaster base coats. Include manufacturer's recommended primers and sealing topcoats for acrylic-based finishes. ;. 4 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Powerflex � Silco; Sto Corp., or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Dryvit Systems, Inc. b. Senergy, Inc. ; k 2. Color and Texture: Match Architect's sample. € 2.8 PLASTER MIXES . � � A. General: Com I with ASTM C 926 for a lications indicated. � P Y PP � 1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base-coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least two q minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber quantities in �' mixes, but do not exceed 1 Ib of fiber/cu. yd. (0.6 kg of fiber/'cu. m) of cementitious ' materials. Reduce aggregate quantities accordingly to maintain workability. €: B. Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat � � plasterwork as follows: ' � $ 1. Portland Cement Mixes: ' a. Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 0 to � 3/4 parts lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material t (sum of separate volumes of each component material). � b. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 0 to 3/4 � parts lime. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of ? separate volumes of each component material). _ f C. Factory-Prepared Finish-Coat Mixes: For acrylic-based finish coatings, comply with £ manufacturer's written instructions. fi � � � PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220-4 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � € 5 � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. � 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects caused by plastering. 3.3 INSTALLING METAL LATH A. Expanded-Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063. 1. Vertical and Horizontal Framing: Install self-furring diamond-mesh lath. � 3.4 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES A. Instal� according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings. B. Reinforcement for Extemal Corners: 1. Install lath-type external-corner reinforcement at exterior locations. 2. Install comerbead at interior locations. C. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, at the following locations: 1. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) of the following maximum sizes: a. Vertical Surfaces: 144 sq.ft. 2. At distances befinreen control joints of not greater than 18 feet o.c. 3. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) with length-to-width ratios of not greater than 2-1/2:1. 4. Where control joints occur in surface of construction directly behind plaster. 5. Where plasterwork areas change dimensions, to delineate rectangular-shaped areas (panels) and to relieve the stress that occurs at the comer formed by the dimension change. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220-5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � F. FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET x VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 y �: 3.5 PLASTER APPLICATION � � ; ; � A. General: Compiy with ASTM C 926. � 1. Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet from a true plane in � finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 10-foot straightedge placed on surface. 2. Grout hollow-metal frames, bases, and similar work occurring in plastered areas, with �' base-coat plaster material, before lathing where necessary. Except where full � grouting is indicated or required for fire-resistance rating, grout at least 6 inches at ; each jamb anchor. { 3. Finish plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories � that act as a plaster ground, unless otherwise indicated. Where casing bead does � not terminate plaster at metal frame, cut base coat free from metal frame before � plaster sets and groove finish coat at junctures with metal. ; 4. Provide plaster surfaces that are ready to receive field-applied finishes indicated. � � B. Acrylic-Based Finish Coatings: Apply coating system, including primers, finish coats, and sealing topcoats, according to manufacturer's written instructions. � � � � 3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING �` � �; A. ., Cut, patch, replace, and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate other work and to � restore cracks, dents, and imperfections. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, � buckles, crazing and check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar r defects and where bond to substrate has failed. � � � � � 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION ; t A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other wock. Promptly remove plaster from . � doorframes, windows, and other surfaces not, indicated to be plastered. Repair floors, � � walls, and other surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during plastering. � f . � END OF SECTION 09220 � � E i 3 � � � �: � � � � � �, � i € , � s � ; � PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220-6 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � r � � E ;: FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � SECTION 09250 -GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits. 3. Tile backing panels. B. Related Sections include the following: 2. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood framing and furring that supports gypsum board. 3. Division 6 Section "Sheathing"for gypsum sheathing. 4. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for insulation and vapor retarders installed in assemblies that incorporate gypsum board. 5. Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for head-of-wall assemblies that incorporate gypsum board. 6. Division 9 Section "Non-Load-Bearing Steel Framing" for non-structural framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board. 9. Division 9 painting Sections for primers applied to gypsum board surfaces. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. For the purposes of this Section, exposure to�moisture or water shall be defined as follows: 1. Direct Exposure: Gypsum Board products behind finished surfaces that will normally and regularly be exposed to liquid water and/or water condensation in the course of normal building operation or use. 2. Incidental Exposure: Gypsum Board products behind finished surfaces that may intermittently be exposed to liquid water and/or water condensation in the course of normal building operation or use. 3. No Exposure: Gypsum Board products behind finished surfaces that will not be exposed to liquid water and/ or water condensation in the course of normal building operation or use. 1.3 SUBMITTALS B. Product Data: For each rype of product indicated. C. Samples: For the following products: 2. Textured Finishes: Manufacturer's standard size, but no smaller than 12-inches- square,for each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work. GYPSUM BOARD 09250-1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET : VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � b 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE � _ A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials ' and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 F by an independent testing agency. ; B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identicaf to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. z j. 1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING � 3 A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from � weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging. � � 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS f A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board ; manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. ` B. Do not install interior products�until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned to the extent indicated or required for successful installation. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are � mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. � PART2 - PRODUCTS � 2.2 PANELS, GENERAL �: A. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each � area and that correspond with support system indicated. fl 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Complying with Material Qualiry Standard(s) as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated. When more than one Standard is indicated, comply with more stringent i requirements. £ 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers x: offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: � ° i GYPSUM BOARD 09250-2 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO f d � i FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 a. American G sum. YP b. Certainteed. c. G-P Gypsum. e. Temple- Inland. f. USG Corporation. B. Typical (Type X): 1. Materiai Qualiry Standards: ASTM C 36 and ASTM C 1396. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 3. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Type C: 1. Material Quality Standards: ASTM C 36 and ASTM C 1396. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated on Drawings. 3. Long Edges: Tapered. E. Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board. 1. Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 1396. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 3. Long Edges: Tapered. I. Moisture-Resistant Type: Paper-faced, with treated, water resistant gypsum core: 1. Material Quality Standards: ASTM C 36 and ASTM C 1396. 2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 3. Long Edges: Tapered. 4. Basis-of-Design Product: "Sheetrock Humitek Gypsum Panels", USG Corporation. J. Mold-Resistant Type: Paperless, with moisture-and mold-resistant core and surfaces. 1. Material Quality Standards: ASTM C 630 and ASTM C 1177. 2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 3. Long Edges: Tapered. 4. Basis-of-Design Product: "DensArmor Plus Interior Drywall", G-P Gypsum. K. Gypsum Liner Panels: Comply with ASTM C 442/C 442M. 1. Type X: Manufacturer's proprietary liner panels with moisture-resistant paper faces. a. Core: 1 inch (25.4 mm)thick. b. Long Edges: Double bevel. 2.4 GYPSUM BOARD FOR EXTERIOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 1. Material Quality Standards: ASTM C 1177. 2. Core: 1/2 inch, Regular Type . GYPSUM BOARD 09250-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � i Y FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET : VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � 3. Long Edges: Tapered. � � 4. Basis-of-Design Product: "Dens-Glass Gold", G-P Gypsum. �: E � 2.5 TILE BACKING PANELS �� A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: � _ � r 1. Material Quality Standard: ASTM C 1178. 2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. � 3. Long Edges: Square. � 4. Basis-of-Design Product: "DensShield Tile Backer', G-P Gypsum. � 5. Provide at locations with direct or incidental exposure to liquid water and/ or water � condensation in the course of normal building operation or use. > � a. At locations with no liquid water and/ or water condensation in the course of � normal building operation or use, provide interior gypsum board panel backings � in compliance with other requirements indicated. � � 2.6 TRIM ACCESSORIES � � A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. � 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc . � 2. Shapes: F � > a. Cornerbead. � k 1) Basis-of-Design Product: "103 Deluxe Comer Bead"; Dietrich Metal Framing. � � � c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. � z � 1) Basis-of-Design Product: "M20A Metal U-Trim/Spackle J"; Dietrich Metal : Framing. � � d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. � � s 1) Basis-of-Design Product: "M20B Metal L-Trim"; Dietrich Metal Framing. � � f. Expansion (control)joint. � � � � 1) Basis-of-Design Product: "093 Zinc Control Joint"; Dietrich Metal Framing. � z s B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047. � � 1. Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, plastic, or rolled zinc . � 2. Shapes: � a. Comerbead. � f � � GYPSUM BOARD 09250-4 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � s � � � � a FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 2.7 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. 3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use high-build interior coating product designed for application by airless sprayer and to be used instead of skim coat to produce Level 5 finish. D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications: 1. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by sheathing board manufacturer. E. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer. 2.8 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemb�ies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. E. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." G. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." GYPSUM BOARD 09250-5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � w a � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 ; s: PART 3-EXECUTION � � � t 3.1 EXAMINATION F � A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal ? frames and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. � `s B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and F mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. F t 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL - k F A. Comply with ASTM C 840. ` ;. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to `= avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of � adjacent panels not less than one framing member. � C. tnstall panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends � �' with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. � D. Locate ed e and end 'oints over su � � g � pports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place � tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of � partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. ; � � � E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. b � F. Cover both faces of su ort framin with � pp g gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above � ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. ` k} Y 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke � ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. � 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. , 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof � slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow ;. 1/4-to 3/8-inch-wide joints to install sealant. } a G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4-to 1/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations, and trim � edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints befinreen edges and ; abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. � I. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, ; including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members, or provide � control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. ; � E GYPSUM BOARD 09250-6 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � i � S FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 J. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Provide interior gypsum board types in the following locations, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Typical (Type X): Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated; Ceiling and other horizontal surfaces where required for specific fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated . 2. Type C: Where required for specific fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated. 4. Ceiling Type: Gypsum board ceiling surFaces where no fire-resistance-rated assembly is indicated. 8. Exterior Ceiling and Soffit Board:Where indicated on Drawings. 9. Tile Backing Panels: a. Glass- Mat, Water- Resistant Backing Board: Backing for vertical tile installations at locations with direct or incidental exposure to liquid water and/or water condensation in the course of normal building operation or use, unless otherwise indicated. 1) At locations with no liquid water and/or water condensation in the course of normal building operation or use, provide interior gypsum board panel backings in compliance with other requirements indicated. � GYPSUM BOARD 09250-7 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � i , ; B. Provide Moisture-and Mold- Resistant Types according to the following table: � w a � w � a � � � � w � � � � w ' � � �- o � J 0 0 � � Walls and Ceilings within following room types(Incidental Exposure): Mechanical Equipment Rooms Finishes: Janitor Closets Paint X X � Laundry Rooms Wall Coverings � � Linen and Refuse Chute Rooms Walls Incorporating the following Ele- ments(Incidental Exposure): � Drinking Fountains ' Isolated Wall-Hung Lavatories Finishes: Countertop Sinks Paint X X Any Other Water Source Wall Coverings (Assume 4'-0"width of exposure, cen- tered on fixture or other water source) t � ,. GYPSUM BOARD 09250-8 � OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � � f- �p £ 4 FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 w a � w a � � � � � z w � � � � w � � � � J � � � � Walls with adjacent plumbing fixtures Finishes: � ("wet walls") (fncidental Exposure) Paint X Wa�l Coverin s OWalls other than"wet walls" Finishes: _ (No Exposure) Paint X X � Wall Coverin s m Tub and Shower Walls Finishes: Z (Direct Exposure) Paint and Wall Cover- X Q ings above other fin- � ishes JSuspended Ceilings(No Exposure) Finishes: X X � Paint only � Walls above ceilings X X Incidental Exposure C. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. D. Multilayer Application: GYPSUM BOARD 09250-9 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO �: FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base .� layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints 1 framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base- � layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. z 4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. 3.4 APPLYING GYPSUM PANELS FOR EXTERIOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS A. Apply panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over supports. 1. Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws. 3.5 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and install at locations indicated to receive tile unless otherwise indicated. � Install with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations. Treat joints and seal cut edges against moisture penetration in compliance with manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3.6 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES � A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings; if not indicated, install according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. 3. L-Bead: Use at exposed conditions where trim is installed after wallboard installation.. 4. LC-Bead: Use at exposed conditions where trim is installed during wallboard installation.. D. Exterior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. ` � GYPSUM BOARD 09250- 10 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 3.7 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. D. Schedule of Gypsum Board Finish: Provide following levels of gypsum board finish per ASTM C 840 and GA-214. 1. Level 1: a. Plenum areas above ceilings. 3. Level 3: c. Mechanical, electrical, telephone and elevator equipment rooms. 4. Level 4: a. All other public and living unit areas not otherwise indicated. F. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 09250 � � GYPSUM BOARD 09250- 11 OZ Architecture B oulder, CO �. FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � z € i. 1 � ; y k S` i 1 � F � GYPSUM BOARD 09250- 12 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO € � � � s � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 ,;; SECTION 09310 -CERAMIC TILE PART1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ceramic and other tile of types indicated. 4. Crack isolation membrane. B. Related Sections: 3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board"for glass-mat, water-resistant backer board. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified. B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in "American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile." C. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated. D. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs. 1.3 SUBMITTALS B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. E. Samples for Verification: 2. Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. Make samples at least 12 inches square , but not fewer than 4 tiles. Use grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed Work. 3. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required. F. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. . G. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile in conformance with ANSI A 137.1, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer. CERAMIC TILE 09310-1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO ; - � �: � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 H. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer. � I. Material Test Reports: For each tile-setting and -grouting product. , 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from one source or producer. 1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area. B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from one manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer. C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from a single manufacturer for each product: 1. Joint sealants. 4. Crack isolation membrane. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels � , intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages. B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. ' � C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided. 4 D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing. E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated � surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in � referenced standards and manufacturer's written instn.�ctions. � CERAMIC TILE 09310-2 � OZ Architecture Boulder,CO { ; i FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattem, and size indicated. 2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise indicated. B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified. C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. D. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with.manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. 1. Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back- or edge- mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in- service performance. E. Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type, protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating with continuous film of petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surFaces. 2.3 TILE PRODUCTS A. Reference Interior Finish Legend in the Drawings for specific tile selections. CERAMIC TILE 09310-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2.6 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE � A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.12 for standard performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. � i. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer. B. Chlorinated Polyethylene Sheet: Nonplasticized, chlorinated polyethylene faced on both sides with nonwoven polyester fabric; 0.030-inch nominal thickness. � 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following : a. Noble Company(The); NobleSeal SIS. ` 2.7 SETTING MATERIALS B. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar(Thin Set): ANSI A118.1. 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Permabond 902", C-Cure, or comparable product by one of the following: a. Bostik, Inc. b. Custom Building Products. c. Laticrete Intemational �� d. MAPEI Corporation. 3. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging � mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.1. C. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar(Thin Set): ANSI A118.4. 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Permabond 902", GCure, or comparable product by one of the following: � f a. Bostik, Inc. b. Custom Building Products. c. Laticrete Intemational d. MAPEI Corporation. 3. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene- butadiene-rubber liquid-latex additive at Project site. 4. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4. D. Medium-Bed, Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: Comply with requirements in ANSI A118.4. Provide product that is approved by manufacturer for application thickness of 3/4 inch . 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Full - Contact 907", C-Cure, or comparable product by one of the following: a. Jamo Inc. � � b. Laticrete Intemational. � c. MAPEI Corporation. CERAMIC TILE 09310-4 �� OZ Architecture Boulder, CO ;` � t � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 d. Mer-Kote Products, Inc. 2.8 GROUT MATERIALS A. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout(Sanded): ANSI A118.7. 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "MP Sanded 924", C-Cure, or comparable product by one of the following: a. Bostik, Inc. b. Summitville Tiles, Inc. c. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company. 3. Polymer Type: Acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix. B. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout(Unsanded): ANSI A118.7. 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "MP NonSanded 923", C-Cure, or comparable product by one of the following: a. Bostik, Inc. .. b. Summitvifle Tiles, Inc. c. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company. 3. Polymer Type: Acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix. E. Grout for Pregrouted Tile Sheets: Same product used in factory to pregrout tile sheets. 2.9 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS . A. General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories that comply with the following requirements and with the applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. Use primers, backer rods, and sealant accessories recommended by sealant manufacturer. I B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed joints unless otherwise indicated. C. Wall Joints: One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: CERAMIC TILE 09310-5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 a. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786. � b. GE Silicones; a division of GE Specialry Materials; Sanitary 1700. c. Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant. d. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 600 White. D. Floor Joints: Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: ASTM C 920; Type M; Grade P; Class 25; Uses T, M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. z - 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Pecora Corporation; NR-200 Urexpan. b. Sika Corporation; Sikaflex-2c SL. c. Tremco Incorporated.; THC-900 . 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS �: J A. Trow�lable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement- based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for i installations indicated. ' C. Temporary Protective Coating: Either product indicated below that is formulated to protect i exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with tile, mortar, and grout products; and easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging g grout or tile. � � k 1. Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, containing at least 0.5 percent oil '� f with a melting point of 120 to 140 deg F per ASTM D 87. 2. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is specially formulated and recommended for use as temporary protective coating for � tile. D. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers. E. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that does not change color or appearance of grout. � 2.11 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout ` manufacturers'written instructions. B. Add materials,water, and additives in accurate proportions. C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, _ and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum - perFormance characteristics for installations indicated. � � , CERAMIC TILE 09310-6 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � r FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. 2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives, bonded mortar bed, or thin-set mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. a. Verify that surFaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified. b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding. 3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed. 4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives or thin-set mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer. B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward drains. C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. D. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile rype or needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces. CERAMIC TILE 09310-7 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � 4 t FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 3.3 TILE INSTALLATION � £ � A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods �` specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series f "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. 1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: b. Tile floors in wet areas. d. Tile floors in laundries. e. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger. `' f. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles. x B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and comers without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. D. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and � center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. 1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints befinreen sheets are not apparent in finished work. 2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints. 3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated. E. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths: 1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch. 3. Paver Tile: 3/8 inch. 4. Stone Tile: '/ inch. 5. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch. 6. Decorative Thin Wall Tile: 1/16 inch. 7. For joint widths up to and including 1/8-inch, provide unsanded grout. 8. For joint widths exceeding 1/8-inch, provide sanded grout. � G. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. � � s � CERAMIC TILE 09310-8 =' OZ Architecture Boulder, CO " � i � � € f FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." J. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to grout joints according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. 3.5 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate. B. Do not install tile or setting materials over crack isolation membrane until membrane has cured. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tife and grout manufacturer's written instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. 3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer and that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent drain clogging. B. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors until grouting is completed and cured and completed installation is ready to receive foot and wheel traffic. D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces. 3.10 INTERIOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Interior Floor Installations,Wood Subfloor: 2. Tile Installation F180: Thin-set mortar on crack isolation membrane over poured gypsum underlayment on plywood subfloor. CERAMIC TILE 09310-9 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO € � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 a. Tile Type: As indicated in Finish Schedule. � b. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar. c. Grout: Polymer-modified, sanded or unsanded as appropriate for joint width. C. Interior Wall Installations,Wood or Metal Studs or Furring: 1. Tile Installation W245 and ANSI A108.5: Interior wall installation over glass-mat, water-resistant backer board; thin-set mortar. a. Tile Type: As indicated in Finish Schedule. b. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar. c. Grout: Polymer-modified, sanded or unsanded as appropriate for joint width. D. Bathtub/Shower Wall Installations,Wood or Metal Studs or Furring: 2. Tile Installation B419: Thin-set mortar on coated glass-mat, water-resistant backer board. a. Tile Type: As indicated in Finish Schedule. b. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar. c. Grout: Polymer-modified, sanded or unsanded as appropriate for joint width. END OF SECTION 09310 � � ; {' CERAMIC TILE 09310- 10 ; OZ Architecture Boulder,CO = � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 09651 -RESILIENT FLOOR TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: � 2. Rubber floor tile. 3. Vinyl composition floor tile. B. Related Sections: 3. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with resilient floor coverings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. E. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required. I. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surFaces. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F , in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F . C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation. RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 -1 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO i i FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation unless otherwise � ,. recommended by manufacturer. E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed, or protect from damage or deterioration that may be caused by other finishing operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS � 2 2.3 RUBBER FLOOR TILE A. Reference Interior Finish Leqend in the DrawinQS for specific vinyl composition floor tile selections. ; 2.4 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE F A. ft�ference Interior Finish Legend in the Drawings for specific vinyl composition floor tile selections. 2.6 INSTALLATION MATERIALS _ A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. � � B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and $ substrate conditions indicated. ` � D. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by � manufacturer. � PART 3 - EXECUTION � 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. � B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interFere with adhesion of floor tile. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ; � � £ RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 -2 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO f i ; � � , fi FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. a. PerForm anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 Ib of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. D. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. E. Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. 3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile. B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. 1. Lay tiles square with room axis unless otherwise indicated. C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1. Lay tiles with grain direction alternating in adjacent tiles (basket-weave pattem) unless otherwise indicated. D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in fumiture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames. RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 -3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor � tiles to center of door openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. G. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint � covers, and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. H. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surFace imperFections. 3 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile. . B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. � C. Protect floor tile products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of i construction period. . 3 D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying liquid floor polish. 1. Apply number of coat(s)and as recommended by manufacturer. G. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09651 t � RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 -4 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO F � € FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 09653 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient base. B. Related Sections: 2. Division 9 Section "Resilient Floor Tile for resilient floor tile." 1.2 SUBMITTALS B. Product Data: For each rype of product indicated. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard- size Samples but not less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required. E. Product Schedule: For resilient products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F , in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by I manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F . RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653-1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been � completed. � PART 2 - PRODUCTS ` F 2.2 RESILIENT BASE A. Reference Interior Finish Legend in the Drawings for specific resilient base selections. C. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861. fi 1. Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset) . 2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous) . 3. Style: Straight(flat or toeless). D. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch . E. Height: As indicated on Drawings. F. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length . G. Outside Comers: Preformed or job formed .�� H. Inside Corners: Preformed or job formed . I. Finish: As selected b Architect from manufacturer's full ran e. � Y 9 � J. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations . ; F t 2.5 INSTALLATION MATERIALS ' ' ; f A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products ' and substrate conditions indicated. ` PART 3- EXECUTION ` 3.1 EXAMINATION =` A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in � other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. � RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653-2 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO s � � i+ FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. 3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION .. A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. G. Job-Formed Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration (whitening)at bends. 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. � 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products. B. PerForm the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO I � f f FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 r�� 1. Remove adhesive and other biemishes from exposed surfaces. � 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. r C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. E. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09653 � � , r �� h ;: f � RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653-4 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 09680 -CARPET PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Broadloom carpet. 4. Carpet cushion. B. Related Sections include the following: 2. Division 9 Section " Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet. 3. Division 9 Section "Carpet Tile." 1.2 REFERENCES: A. American National Standards for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People ANSI A117.1. C. The Carpet and Rug Institute "Standard for Installation of Commercial Textile Floorcovering Materials" (CRI 104). 1.3 SUBMITTALS B. Product Data: For the following, including installation recommendations for each type of substrate: 1. Carpet: For each type indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include certified laboratory test reports for flammability and static tests. 2. Carpet Cushion: For each type indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics and durabiliry. C. Shop Drawings: Show the following as applicable for carpet and installation rype(s): 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet. 4. Carpet type, color, and dye lot. 6. Seam locations, types, and methods. 7. Type of subfloor. 8. Type of installation. 9. Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point. 10. Pile direction. 12. Type, color, and location of edge,transition, and other accessory strips. CARPET 09680-1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 13. Transition details to other flooring materials. � D. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet: 12-inch-square Sample. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch-long Samples. 4. Carpet Seam: 6-inch Sample. E. Product Schedule: For carpet Use same designations indicated on Drawings. F. Qualification Data: For Installer and Manufacturer. G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. H. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet. I. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. � 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE � � A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer with no less than five year's experience installing carpet tile systems of similar type and scope to this project, who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm with not less than 5 years of production experience with carpet manufacturing, and whose published product literature clearly indicates general compliance of products with requirements of this section. E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements ' in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling." � 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS � A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and Section 7.12, "Ventilation." � CARPET 09680-2 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO ;: , � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 w; B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet and carpet cushion until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. C. Do not install carpet and carpet cushion over concrete slabs until slabs have cured, are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, and have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer. D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet, install carpet before installing these items. 1.7 WARRANTY C. Special Warranty for Carpet: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, loss of tuft bind strength, and delamination. 3. Warranty Period from date of Substantial Completion: 10 years. D. Special Warranty for Carpet Cushion: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet cushion installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty includes consequent removal and replacement of carpet and accessories. 2. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet cushion due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate,vandalism, or abuse. 3. Failure includes, but is not limited to, permanent indentation or compression. • 4. Warranty Period: Lifetime of carpet. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.2 BROADLOOM CARPET A. Reference Interior Finish Legend in the Drawings for specific carpet selections. 2.4 CARPET CUSHION A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Leggett 8� Platt, Inc.; "Uniloc 10", 5/32 inch thick. CARPET 09680-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO 1 FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2.5 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES � A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet cushion manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining rype to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and is recommended or provided by carpet and carpet cushion manufacturers. D. Seam Adhesive: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for sealing and taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure � seams and to prevent pile loss at seams. _ PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION ;: A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Examine carpet for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other � materials that may interFere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet cushion manufacturer. 2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in- , Place Concrete"for slabs receiving carpet. 3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. _ D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet manufacturers written installation instructions for preparing substrates. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch, t unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer. � D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. � CARPET 09680-4 � � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with CRI 104 and carpet and carpet cushion manufacturers' written installation instructions for the following: 2. Double-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 10, "Double Glue- Down Installation." B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations and Shop Drawings for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position. C. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet. D. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. E. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. .. G. Lay carpet on floors with run of the pile in same direction as traffic flow. H. Lay carpet on stairs with run of the pile in opposite direction of traffic to avoid peeking of backing on nosings. I. Do not seam in traffic direction at doorways. K. Comply with carpet�cushion manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Remove yams that protrude from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element. B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protection of Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer and carpet cushion and adhesive manufacturers. CARPET 09680-5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO i� � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 END OF SECTION 09680 � • � � � � � F , � � �, k t 3 E { � i CARPET 09680-6 s OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � � � € FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 09681 -CARPET TILE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes modular carpet tile. B. Related Sections include the following: 2. Division 9 Section " Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet tile. 1.2 SUBMITTALS B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate. C. Shop Drawings: Show the following as applicable for carpet and installation type(s): 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tiles. 4. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot. 5. Type of subfloor. 6. Type of installation. 7. Pattem of installation. 8. Pattem type, location, and direction. 9. Pile direction. 11. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 12. Transition details to other flooring materials. D. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattem, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- long Samples. E. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. F. Qualification Data: For Installer. G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. H. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: CARPET TILE 09681 - 1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � € FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products � and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet � tile. I. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements. ` E: 4 B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities ; having jurisdiction. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements � in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling." � g 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS _ A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and € Section 7.12, "Ventilation." � B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tiles until wet work in spaces is complete � and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. _ D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, install carpet tiles before installing these items. ` 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranry period. � 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, � ; failure of substrate,vandalism, or abuse. � � CARPET TILE 09681 -2 ' £ OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � 3 r� � c FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, loss of tuft bind strength, dimensional stability, and delamination. 3. Warranty Period: As indicated by reference to specific products, from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.2 CARPET TILE A. Reference Interior Finish Legend in the Drawings for specific carpet tile selections. Q. Backing System: As indicated. 2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for instal{ed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION . A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. C. For wood subfloors, verify the following: 1. Underlayment over subfloor complies with requirements specified in Division 6 Section "Sheathing." 2. Underlayment surface is free of irregularities and substances that may interfere with I adhesive bond or show through surface. E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation. CARPET TILE 09681 -3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 B. Use trowelable levelin and atchin compounds, according to manufacturer's written � 9 P 9 instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level ;i cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch, x unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. _ C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible ; with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Installation Method: Glue down; install every tile with full-spread, releasable, pressure- sensitive adhesive . C. Maintain dye lot integriry. Do not mix dye lots in same area. D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. s E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, � removable flanges,alcoves, and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future t cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. , G. Install pattem parallel to walls and borders. � 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. �` � 2. Remove yams that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element � � � B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protection of Indoor Installations." � C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. � � * � CARPET TILE 09681 -4 £ OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � k G FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 END OF SECTION 09681 CARPET TILE 09681 -5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � � 4 � 2 t F i i`. � � f. CARPET TILE 09681 -6 ;�� OZ Architecture Boulder, CO E � , x FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 09911 -EXTERIOR PAINTING PART1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following exterior substrates: 1. Wood. 2. Exterior gypsum board. 3. Fiber-cement. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 Section "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 6. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat indicated. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. • C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. MPI Standards: 1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List." 2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual"for products and paint systems indicated. EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 -1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO !; FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING � A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are befinreen 50 and 95 deg F. # B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surFaces. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 Manufacturers" Article lists manufacturers with MPI-approved products for MPI paint categories included in the Section Text. Not all manufacturers provide approved products in every category. The list was current when this Section was updated; see current "MPI � s Approved Products List"at www.paintinfo.com for updated lists of manufacturers. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS � A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. ICI Paints. 3. Kelly-Moore Paints. 4. Kwal-Howells Paint. 5. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 6. Sherwin-Williams Company(The). 2.3 PAINT, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. _ �: B. Colors: Match Architect's samples. � � _ EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 -2 ; - OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 2.4 PRIMERS/SEALERS A. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint system indicated. 2.5 PRIMERS A. Exterior Latex Primer: MPI #6. 2.6 EXTERIOR LATEX PAINTS A. Exterior Latex(Low Sheen): MPI #15(Gloss Level 3). B. Exterior Latex(Semigloss): MPI #11 (Gloss Level 5). PART 3 - EXECUTION �.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Wood: 15 percent. 2. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 -3 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO I � k- FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to � reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. 2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, ' identification, perFormance rating, or nomenclature plates. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends,faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperFections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. E. Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. � 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only. B. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. f C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. _ 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance of paint materials with product { requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying-paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces � EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 -4 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO ;. i ; � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Dressed Lumber Substrates: Including wood doors and wood and fiber-cement trim. 1. Latex System: MPI EXT 6.3L. a. Prime Coat: Exterior latex primer(excluding pre-primed items). b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex (semigloss). B. Wood Panel Substrates: Including wood and fiber-cement soffits. 1. Latex System: MPI EXT 6.4K. a. Prime Coat: Exterior latex wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex(low sheen). C. Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Latex System: MPI EXT 9.2A. a. Prime Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex (low sheen). END OF SECTION 09911 EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 -5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO n; � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � � � fi � � # � EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 -6 � OZ Architecture Boulder,CO i i FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 09912 - INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Concrete. 3. Concrete masonry units(CMU). 4. Steel. 7. Wood. 8. Gypsum board. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Sections for shop priming of inetal substrates with primers specified in this Section. 4. Division 9 Section "Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates. 6. Division 9 painting Sections for high-performance or special-use coatings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat indicated. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. E. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. MPI Standards: 1. Products: Com I in with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI A roved P Y 9 PP Products List." � 2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual"for products and paint systems indicated. INTERIOR PAINTING 09912-1 OZ Architecture Boulder CO , � S,: _ 7 FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 B. Benchmark Samples: Apply benchmark sampies of each paint system indicated and each � color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application ' of each paint system specified in Part 3. ; , a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq.ft.. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. 3. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. � �: 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING '_ r � A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient c temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. ` � �� 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS � � � A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.2 MANUFACTURERS B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the � following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 25. ICI Paints. 29. Kelly-Moore Paints. 31. Kwal-Howells Paint. 40. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 42. Sherwin Williams Company(The). � INTERIOR PAINTING 09912-2 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � � 8 :n � t FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2.3 PAINT, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of senrice and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. B. Colors and Sheens: . 2.4 BLOCK FILLERS A. Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler: MPI #4. 2.5 PRIMERS/SEALERS A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50. B. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint systems indicated. 2.6 METAL PRIMERS A. Quick-Drying Alkyd Metal Primer: MPI #76. 2.7 WOOD PRIMERS A. Interior Latex-Based Wood Primer: MPI #39. 2.8 LATEX PAINTS A. Interior Latex(Low Sheen): MPI #44(Gloss Level 2). B. Interior Latex(Semigloss): MPI#54 (Gloss Level 5). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. � INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 -3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO a � , FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture � meter as follows: ` � 1. Concrete: 12 percent. � 2. Masonry(Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. 4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing ` finishes and primers. ± D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. _ � 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and � conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION ' A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural F Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide ` surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. � 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to y reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. 2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, } identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. � � C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efFlorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surFaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Concrete Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. t F. Steel Substrates (Field-Applied Primers): Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using � methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. f H. Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. � _ 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. ` � INTERIOR PAINTING 09912-4 T OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � _ 4 � ; k P FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. I. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or fumiture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Unless otherwise indicated, paint items exposed to public view including, but not limited to,the following: � 1. Mechanical Work: a. Uninsulated metal piping. b. Uninsulated plastic piping. c. Pipe hangers and supports. d. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. e. Visible portions of internal surfaces of inetal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets. f. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. g. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. 2. Electrical Work: a. Switchgear. b. Panelboards. c. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. INTERIOR PAINTING 09912-5 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 3. Do not paint electrical and mechanical work concealed from public view unless � otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Do not paint electrical and mechanical work exposed to public view at Level 1 Parking, Storage, Mechanical, or Electrical spaces unless otherwise required by � authorities having jurisdiction. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied: � 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. 2. Testing agency will perForm tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials ; being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying-paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the finro paints are incompatible. .. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION � A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. , C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or � defaced painted surfaces. $ 3.8 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: ; 1. Latex System: MPI INT 3.1 E. _ a. Prime Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex. C. CMU Substrates: � � INTERIOR PAINTING 09912-6 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO �' � t. FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1. Latex System: MPI INT 4.2A. a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex block filler. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex. D. Steel Substrates: 2. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 5.1 Q. a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying alkyd metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex. F. Dressed Lumber Substrates: Including [architectural woodwork;] (doors] . 1. Latex System: MPI INT 6.3T. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex. G. Wood Panel Substrates: Including [painted plywood) . 1. Latex System: MPI INT 6.4R. .�:.. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex. H. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A. . . a. Prime Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex. END OF SECTION 09912 INTERIOR PAINTING 09912-7 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � t � k i!! t � INTERIOR PAINTING 09912-8 ` OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � b � C 6 FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 09920 - PAVEMENT MARKING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Conditions of the Contract for Construction and the General Requirements of Division 1 of these Specifications apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. The Work of this Section includes furnishing all material, labor,equipment and services to paint the following items of the types, pattems, sizes and colors as indicated on the Drawings. 1. Parking stripes 2. Traffic arrows 3. Walkway stripes 4. Text 5. ADA accessible space logo 1.3 RELATED WORK �� A. The following Work is related to this Section: 1. Submittals Section 01300 2. Asphalt Paving Section 02500 3. Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 03300 4. Concrete Sealers Section 07180 5. Traffic-Bearin Membranes Section 07570 9 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review and approval Manufacturer's Spec Data Sheets of each product to be used. B. Submit for record Material Safety Data Sheets of each product, solvent, or related chemicals to be used, and certification that the materials conform to local, state, and federal environmental and worker's safety laws and regulations. C. Submit for record standard color chip. D. Submit for review and approval shop drawings indicating stall size, spacing, etc. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Manufacturer and Installer are required to confirm that all materials used in accordance with this Section conform to local, state,and federal environmental and workers'safety laws and regulations. PAVEMENT MARKING 09920- 1 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO ; � � f FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � 1. VOC content of materials shall not exceed the limits per Environmental Protection 4 t Agency National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards forArchitectural Coatings(40CFR59). B. The Installer is solely responsible for fume control and shall take all necessary pre- cautions against injury to personnel or adjacent building occupants during application. As a minimum, Installer shall take the following precautions: 1. Provide and maintain barricades. 2. Locate and protect building air intakes during application. 3. Follow all state,federal, and local safety regulations. 4. Follow all Manufacturer's safety requirements. 5. Dispose empty containers immediately and properly. 6. Use protective equipment. 7. Ensure work area is well vented to the exterior. '!.6 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Deliver all materials to site in original, unopened containers bearing the following information: 1. Name of Product 2. Name of Manufacturer ` 3. Date of Manufacture 4. Lot or Batch Number � B. Store materials under cover and protected from the weather. C. Replace containers showing any signs of damage with new material at no additional cost to Owner. D. Mix and prepare coatings only in areas designated by the Contractor for that purpose. E. Take precautions to prevent fire in or around coatings materials. Provide and maintain hand fire extinguisher near storage and mixing area. s F. At no time shall the weight of the stored material placed on a slab area exceed 30 PSF or 2,000 Ibs. over 20 square inches. PART 2 - PRODUCTS � 2.1 PAVEMENT MARKINGS—ALKYD(SOLVENT BASED) A. All materials shall meet Federal Specification TT-P-115F B. Provide pavement markings as indicated on the Drawings. z C. Approved alkyd pavement markings are: � PAVEMENT MARKING 09920-2 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � € � � � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 1. SetFast Premium Alkyd Zone Marking Paint, The Sherwin Williams Company, Cleveland, Ohia a. A300 White b. A303 Lead-Free Yellow c. A302 Red d. A305 Black e. Handicap Blue Use A300 White as base and tint 2. Alkyd Zone Marking Paint, ICI Dulux Paints, Cleveland, Ohio. a. 22694/22693 White b. 20086/20126 Lead-Free Yellow c. 20081/20082 Red d. 20085/28744 Black e. 20083/20084 Handicap Blue 3. Or approved equal. 2.2 PAVEMENT MARKING BEADS A. All materials shall meet AASHTO Standard Specification M247, Glass Beads used in traffic paints, Type I. Beads shall be treated with a performance adhesion coating. B. Provide Glass Beads at a rate of 6 pounds per gallon into all tra�c arrows,center traffic lines,walkway stripes and floor text to produce reflectorized pavement markings. Glass beads are not required in parking space striping. C. Approved pavement marking bead manufacturers are: 1. Cataphote Inc., Jackson, MS. 2. Potters Industries Inc., Valley Forge, PA. 3. Flex-O-Lite, St. Louis, MO. 4. Or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Inspect surfaces to which paint will be applied and report immediately in writing to the Engineer as required in the General Conditions any conditions detrimental to the proper execution of this work. B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are acceptably remedied. Commence- ment of work implies acceptance of related work. 3.2 PREPARATION PAVEMENT MARKING 09920-3 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO [ FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � A. Before commencing work, make certain that surfaces are clean, dry, and in sound condition. B. Any existing paint stripes shall be removed by grinding or scarifying so that no visible paint stripe remains. (Restoration) C. Do not paint any surface which is wet or damp. i � D. Remove all oil, dust, grease, dirt, and other foreign material to ensure adequate f adhesion. ` E. Lay out all striping on each level, using dimensions indicated on the Drawings. Report any discrepancies, interFerences or changes in striping due to field conditions to the Engineer prior to painting. Paint Contractor shall be required to remove paint, repair surface and repaint stripes not applied in strict accordance with the Drawings. F. Verify compatibility with concrete sealer,joint sealant,traffic bearing membrane,and all other surface treatments as specified in Division 7. 3.3 MIXING A. Do not intermix different types of materials or materials from different Manufacturers. B. Do not thin material except as recommended by Manufacturer for spray application. C. Mix paint thoroughly by boxing, stirring or power agitation before use. � 3.4 APPLICATION A. Apply painting and finishing materials in accordance with the Manufacturer's directions. Use techniques best suited for the material and surfaces to which applied. Apply at 15 mils wet thickness. B. Do not apply paint when the air and/or surface temperature is below 50 degrees F,when relative humidity exceeds 85%,when rain is threatening or late in the evening when dew might form before drying. C. Allow concrete to age 60 days(asphalt 90 days) before coating. D. Parking space striping dimensions indicated on the Drawings are nominal dimensions. Tolerances shall be as follows: 1. Parking space length shall equal indicated length±2 inches. 2. Parking space width(or base line dimension)shall equal indicated width± 1 inch. 3. Striping shall extend to within not more than 3 inches from walls or other vertical surfaces. 4. A string of parking spaces shall equal indicated dimension ±2 inches per run. PAVEMENT MARKING 09920-4 � OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � � � 4 FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 5. Stripe width shall equal 4 inches± 1/2 inch. E. For traffic arrows,walkways stripes, and floor text add glass beads on wet paint so that proper bead embedment and retention is achieved. 3.5 CLEANING A. Immediately upon completion of work,clean up all paint spots,remove excess materials and equipment, and repair all paint damage to other finishes. END OF SECTION 09920 � i � PAVEMENT MARKING 09920-5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � #. � ; t � t. ' t` 4 i" r � � � � `t 3 t i { ( � � ! � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 09960- HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and application of high-performance coating systems on the following substrates: 1. Exterior Substrates: d. Steel. e. Galvanized metal. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Sections for shop priming of inetal substrates with primers specified in this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system and in each color and gloss of finish coat indicated. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for focation and application area. E. Product List: For each product indicated. Cross-reference products to coating system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Master Painters Institute (MPI)Standards: 1. Products: Com I in with MPI n r ' " ' " P s t a d a d s i n d i c a t e d i n M P I A r o v e d P r o d u c t s L i s t. Y 9 PP 2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual"for products and coating systems indicated. B. Samples: Apply benchmark samples of each coating system indicated to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. II HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09960- 1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO . . � t FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surFaces and conditions for application � of each type of coating and substrate. a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq.ft.. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. 3. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. _ 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. � 1.5 PROJECT�CONDITIONS � A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air � � temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. :` � B. Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 ` percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 4 PART2-PRODUCTS 2.2 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as i demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system. B. Colors: As indicated . t 2.3 MANUFACTURERS B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the � following, unless otherwise indicated: � � HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09960-2 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � t € E f FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 1. Benjamin Moore 8�Co. 2. ICI Paints. 3. Kelly-Moore Paints. 4. Kwal-Howells Paint. 5. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 6. Sherwin-Williams Company(The). 7. Tnemec Company(The). 2.6 METAL PRIMERS o:...e.. iuo�*�n �. €�e;��ar��--r:,,,��.,,��. E. Polvamide Epoxv Primer: � 1. Basis-of-Desiqn Product: Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline. Tnemec Companv 2 Tt he1• Z� CD�1YV/"�1ATIA1�'_C . � � . . 2.9 POLYURETHANE COATINGS , , , . . B. Aliphatic Acrvlic Polvurethane: 1. , Basis-of-Desiqn Product: Series 175 Endura-Shield, Tnemec Companv(The). PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting perFormance of work. 1. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 3. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 4. Coating application indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09960-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 3.2 PREPARATION � A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be coated. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and coating. 1. After completing coating operations, reinstall items that were removed; use workers skilled in the trades involved or otherwise reinstall to match original installation. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce coating systems indicated. G. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. 1. Clean using methods recommended in writing by coating manufacturer. H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied coatings. 3.3 APPLICATION � A. Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions. ; 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated. 2. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed � surfaces. Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Coat back sides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged ' items to match exposed surfaces. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. ; C. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance. s D. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and color breaks. x � �: HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09960-4 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � R FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when coatings are being applied: 1. Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample coating material being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with specified requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials being used do not comply with specified requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying coating materials from Project site, pay for testing, and recoat surFaces coated with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously coated surfaces if, on recoating with complying materials, the two coatings are incompatible. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings �� by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. � C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces. � 3.7 EXTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE . , , . � a. Pr:..,s��r�.. ...:..,e.� ..o��z0. . . , , , • . . > > , , • • , - . . , . . . , , , , \ll D�m-i--irrc • • f f f r • HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09960-5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET a VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 G. Steel and Galvanized Metal Substrates: � 1. Aliphatic Acrvlic Poivurethane, Piqmented, Over Polvamide Epoxv Primer: a. Prime Coat: Polvamide epoxv primer, 3 mils DFT. � b. Topcoat: Aliphatic acrvlic polvurethane,4 mils DFT. END OF SECTION 09960 f � £ s � � � � � r � k � f � � i HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09960-6 F: OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � 3 FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 10201 - LOUVERS AND VENTS PART 1 -GENERAL � 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fixed, extruded-aluminum louvers. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 15 Sections for louvers that are part of inechanical equipment. 12 DEFINITIONS A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. B. Horizontal Louver: �Louver with horizontal blades; i.e., the axes of the blades are horizontal. C. Storm-Resistant Louver: Louver that provides specified wind-driven rain performance, as determined by testing according to AMCA 500-L. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall be considered to act normal to the face of the building. 1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on pressures as indicated on Drawings. B. Seismic Performance: Louvers, including attachments to other construction, shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7. C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surFace temperature changes, without buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, or other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change(Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F , material surfaces. D. Louver PerFormance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length and width according to AMCA 500-L. LOUVERS AND VENTS 10201 - 1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � �: FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 1.4 SUBMITTALS � A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals. B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing. 1. Show weep paths, gaskets, flashing, sealant, and other means of preventing water intrusion. 2. Show mullion profiles and locations. C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed according to AMCA 500-L by a qualified testing agency or by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of louver and showing compliance with perfoRnance requirements specified. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers and vents from single source from a single � manufacturer where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: ,,,� 1. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code-Aluminum." C. SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Mefal Manual"for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221,Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6. B. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions. 1. Use Phillips flat-head screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 2. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners. 3. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers. LOUVERS AND VENTS 10201 -2 � OZ Architecture Boulder,CO = FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 C. Postinstalied Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors, made from stainless-steel components, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times the loads imposed, for concrete, or 6 times the load imposed, for masonry, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 2.2 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Maintain equal louver blade spacing to produce uniform appearance. C. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints. 1. Frame Type: Channel unless otherwise indicated. D. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly. E. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than recommended by manufacturer, or 72 inches o.c., whichever is less. 1. Semirecessed Mullions: Where indicated, provide mullions partly recessed behind louver blades so louver blades appear continuous. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate with interlocking split mullions and close-fitting blade splices designed to permit expansion and contraction. F. Provide subsills made of same material as louvers or extended sills for recessed louvers. G. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds, threaded fasteners, or both, as standard with louver manufacturer unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections befinreen frame members necessary. 2.3 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS I A. Horizontal Storm-Resistant Louver: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Architectural Louvers; Model E4WH, standard construction, "J" channel frame mounting option, or comparable product by one of the following: a. Airolite Company, LLC (The). b. N strom Buildin Products. Y 9 2. Louver Depth:4 inches. LOUVERS AND VENTS 10201 -3 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 3. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.063 (blade) and 0.081 (frame) .,,� inch. 4. Louver Performance Ratings: a. Free Area: Not less than 8.09 sq. ft. for 48-inch wide by 48-inch high louver. b. Air PerFormance: Not more than 0.21-inch wg static pressure drop at 900-fpm free-area intake velocity. c. Wind-Driven Rain Performance: Not less than 99 percent effectiveness when subjected to a rainfall rate of 8 inches per hour and a wind speed of 50 mph at a core-area intake velocity of 1250 fpm. 5. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal. 2.4 LOUVER SCREENS A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver. 1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face. 2. Screening Type: Bird screening. B. Secure screen frames to louver frames with stainless-steel machine screws, spaced a maximum of 6 inches from each corner and at 12 inches o.c. C. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated. 1. Metal: Same kind and form of inetal as indicated for louver to which screens are � t attached. 2. Finish: Mill finish unless otherwise indicated. 3. Type: Non-rewirable, U-shaped frames. " � D. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers: ; 1. Bird Screening: Flattened,expanded aluminum, 3/4 by 0.050 inch thick. 2.5 FINISHES, GENERAL ; A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish louvers after assembly. B. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils(0.04 mm). Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning,conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. LOUVERS AND VENTS 10201 -4 � � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � k � i- � '. FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAIV)INATION A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured. � D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated. . E. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Retum items that cannot be refinished in the field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units. F. Ptotect unpainted galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic flashing. G. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"for sealants applied during louver installation. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected by temporary covering, to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate during construction period. LOUVERS AND VENTS 10201 -5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 =; � i B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not � harmful to finishes. Thoroughiy rinse surfaces and dry. � C. Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction so no evidence ;: remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units. F � 1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and � gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating. END OF SECTION 10201 £ f [ 3 ti i � [ � k 't i `s i F E � t_ LOUVERS AND VENTS 10201 -6 t OZ Architecture Boulder, CO i � � � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 10310— MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes outdoor gas grille, mounting post, hardware, and accessories required for a complete, ready-to-use installation. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit shop drawings and product data on fireplaces and all accessories as specified under Section 01300 Submittals. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Grilles and accessories must be listed and approved by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and the International Conference of Building Officials. Piping and installation shall meet building code requirements referenced in Division 1. �.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store in original crates and under cover until ready for installation. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 GAS GRILLES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Modern Home Products Corp. 2. Approved substitute B. Gas Grille: Model WNK4DD Outdoor Gas Grille; cast aluminum housing; 642 square inches of total cooking area; 40,000 BTU rated per-hour input; 5/16" 2-piece stainless steel cooking grid; (2)stainless steel swing-away warming racks. Provide Model MPP In-Ground Post Mount with hardware required for complete tum- key installation. Provide piping, valves, connections, and controls as required by authorities having jurisdiction. MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 10310-1 OZ Architecture 6oulder,CO � � � � ; x FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET �� VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 F PART 3 - EXECUTION � � ( 3.1 INSTALLATION t" A. install gas grille, post mount, piping, and accessories according to approved shop drawings, product data, and manufacturer's installation instructions. Comply with applicable codes, ordinances, and other requirements. Maintain all required clearances to combustible � materials. B. Gas Service: By Mechanical Contractor. � END OF SECTION 10310 � Y � t � ~ S E t' t M: 4 # � � '€ MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 10310-2 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � _ � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 10431 -SIGNAGE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Code required panel signs and supplementary items necessary to complete their installation. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Parkina Accessories" for accessible aarkinq siqnaae. 2. Division 14 Elevator Sections for code-required elevator signage. �3. Division 16 Sections for labels, tags, and nameplates for electrical equipment. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act(ABA)Accessibility Guidelines." 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. • B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs. 1. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories. 2. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and Braille, and layout for each sign. C. Sign Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations for Signs: Obtain each sign type indicated from one source from a single manufacturer. SIGNAGE 10431 -1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 C. Re ulato Re uirements: Comply with code provisions as adopted by authorities having � 9 rY q jurisdiction and with applicable provisions in ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. for the following: 1. Tactile and Braille Characters. 2. Typestyles. 3. Character Height. 4. Pictograms (Symbols). 5. Finish and Contrast. 6. Mounting Location and Height. 1.5 COOFZDINATION A. Coordinate placement of anchorage devices with templates for installing signs. PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PANEL SIGNS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Best Sign Systems; "Word and Picture Signs" or a comparable manufacturer and product, acceptable to Architect: B. Interior Panel Signs: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under � installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally from comer to corner, complying with the following requirements: e 1. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: 0.125 inch thick. 2. Edge Condition: Square cut or Beveled. . 3. Corner Condition: Square or Rounded. 4. Mounting: Unframed. t a. Manufacturer's standard anchors for substrates encountered. 5. Custom Paint Colors: Match Pantone color matching system. 6. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 7. Tactile and Braille Characters: Manufacturer's standard process for producing text and symbols complying with ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC/ANSI A117.1. Text shall be accompanied by Grade 2 Braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square-cut edges free from burrs and cut marks; Braille dots with f domed or rounded shape. a. Raised-Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch. ; 2.2 SIGN SCHEDULE A. Stairs: � SIGNAGE 10431 -2 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO ; FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 1. Provide a sign at each door to each stairway on each floor. 2. Message: I a. Required wording for exiting as required by the local code authorities. "STAIR WAY". b. Braille message as required by ADA. B. Inside Stairs: 1. Provide a sign at each door in stairways. 2. Message: As required by local code authorities. a. Identify stair location. b. Identify floor level. c. Identif�r all floors served. d. Identify stairway's upper terminus. 3. Braille message as required by ADA. C. Elevator Lobbies: 1. Provide a sign at each elevator on other than Level One. ' .. a. Message: � 1) Required wording and diagram for exiting as required by the local code authorities. "IN CASE OF FIRE DO NOT USE ELEVATORS USE STAIRS" 2) Graphic symbols that are appropriate, including Fire Evacuation Map. 3) Braille message as required by ADA. b. Mount above elevator call button. D. Other Rooms: 1. Provide a sign at each door that leads into the following rooms or similar room types: a. TELEPHONE ROOM b. ELECTRICAL ROOM c. JANITOR CLOSET d. MECHANICAL ROOM e. MAIN TELEPHONE ROOM f. MAIN ELECTRICAL ROOM g. FIRE PUMP ROOM h. FIRE CONTROL ROOM i. ELEVATOR MACHINE ROOM SIGNAGE 10431 -3 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO �I �' 4' P FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 t 2. Braille message as required by ADA. ..,� 2.3 FABRICATION ;� A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard signs of configurations indicated. ` s � 1. Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will be inconspicuous. � �: PART 3-EXECUTION � 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Verify that items are sized and located to accommodate signs. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. �' 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described ,� and complying with manufacturer's written instructions. , � 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated,with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. � x 2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where '' applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on ` r nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign without k encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door. - B. Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more stringent requirements apply. °' k € 1. Two-Face Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces. 2. Hook-and-Loop Tapes: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. f 3. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Attach signs to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered surfaces. ' � 4. Shim Plate Mounting: Provide 1/8-inch thick, concealed aluminum shim plates with � predrilled and countersunk holes, at locations indicated, and where other mounting methods are not practicable. Attach plate with fasteners and anchors suitable for ;: secure attachment to substrate. Attach panel signs to plate using methods specified ; above. ' � SIGNAGE 10431 -4 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � € : FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner. END OF SECTION 10431 SIGNAGE 10431 -5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � f: FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 ° � j { P � � j � SIGNAGE 10431 -6 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO ; � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 10522 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS PART1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire protection cabinets for the following: a. Portable fire extinguishers. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 9 painting Sections for field painting fire protection cabinets. 2. Division 10 Section "Signage" for directional signage to out-of-sight fire extinguishers and cabinets. 3. Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguishers." 1.3 SUBMITTALS �� B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire protection cabinets. 1. Fire Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. C. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. F. Maintenance Data: For fire protection cabinets to incfude in maintenance manuals. � j 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated. C. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths. 1.6 SEQUENCING A. Apply vinyl lettering on field-painted, fire protection cabinets after painting is complete. FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 10522- 1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO # � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 PART 2-PRODUCTS � 22 MATERIALS =; A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. F. Clear Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3, 6 mm thick. t 2.3 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET A. Cabi�et Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. � r 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following : � a. Fire End & Croker Corporation; 1600— 1610 Series. b. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group; Ambassador Series. c. Larsen's Manufacturing Company; Architectural Series. B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated . C. Cabinet Material: Steel sheet. E. Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame � overlapping surrounding wall surFace with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for recessed cabinets but are of sufficient depth to accommodate semirecessed cabinet installation. i 1. Square-Edge Trim: 1-1/4-to 1-1/2-inch backbend depth. 2. Locations:Typical cabinets unless otherwise indicated � F. Surface-Mounted Cabinet: Cabinet box fully exposed and mounted directly on wall with no trim. � � 1. Locations: Level One cabinets. � G. Cabinet Trim Material: Steel sheet . H. Door Material: Steel sheet � I. Door Style: Vertical duo panel with frame . � ; J. Door Glazing: Clear float glass . i K. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for f cabinet rype,trim style, and door material and style indicated. 1. Provide projecting lever handle with cam-action latch . �' 2. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to � open 180 degrees. � FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 10522-2 � OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � f 4 � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 ;� L. Accessories: 1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish. 4. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling sharply on door handle . 5. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Architect . a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER ." 1) Location: Applied to cabinet door . 2) Application Process: Pressure-sensitive vinyl letters. 3) Lettering Color: Red . 4) Orientation: Vertical . M. Finishes: 1. Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the following: a. Exterior of cabinet , door, and trim except for those surfaces indicated to receive another finish. �� b. Interior of cabinet and door. 3. Steel: Factory primed for field painting . 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub)with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type,trim style, and door style indicated. 1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. 3. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks. 4. Install door locks at factory. B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch thick. 3. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 10522-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � ff } � FIRST CHA►R PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � 2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS � A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for ` recommendations for applying and designating finishes. � 4 B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surFaces of fire protection cabinets from damage f. by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. � � C. Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly. D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. � k 2.8 STEEL FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPGSP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning" � � B. Factory Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, fead-and chromate-free, t universat primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. ' E PART 3- EXECUTION � 3: 3.1 EXAMINATION ' A. Examine roughing-in for cabinets to verify actual locations of piping connections before cabinet installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. � 3.2 PREPARATION ; � � A. Prepare recesses for semirecessed fire protection cabinets as required by type and size of r cabinet and trim style. f' 3.3 INSTALLATION ;' A. General: Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to stn.�cture, square and plumb. ; 3. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire protection cabinets, square and plumb. � 6 t fr � f 4. FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 10522-4 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � . , FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. C. On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers. E. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 10522 � FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 10522-5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO . � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET ^ VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � � € i a s 3 k F s 5 § { 4 3 � € S k t t �- � r. � S FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 10522-6 � OZ Architecture Boulder,CO ? � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 10523 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguisher Cabinets." 1.3 SUBMITTALS B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher and mounting brackets. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals. E. Warranty: Sample of special warranry. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, • "Portable Fire Extinguishers." B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent I testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 COORDINATION , A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10523-1 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers. � 2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS � A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of � the following : e. Fire End 8 Croker Corporation. � f. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. g. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc. : F h. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 3. Valves: Manufacturer's standard . 4. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard . 5. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, � Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging. � M. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container : UL-rated 3-A:40-B:C, 5-Ib nominal capacity,with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container. ' ( 2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, " with plated or red baked-enamel finish. E f 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following : � ; c. Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company. ` e. Fire End & Croker Corporation. � f. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. � g. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. �' Y B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. 1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface. t a. Orientation: Vertical . _ � � FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10523-2 `: OZ Architecture Boulder, CO ? � � 4 , S FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated. END OF SECTION 10523 . . � FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10523-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO �' � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � � _. t s � � i 7 z ., y � � S € g 3 F � t 4 { `Y. (' t i E ; , 4 � � � FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10523-4 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO £ £ f 4 , s FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 10605 -WIRE MESH PARTITIONS PART1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standard-duty wire mesh partitions. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. As defined in ASTM E 2016: 1. Lock Crimp: Deep crimps at points of the intersection that lock wires securely in place. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for wire mesh items. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include clearances required for operation of doors. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. 1. Installer's responsibilities include fabricating and installing wire mesh items and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. 2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for wire mesh items, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain wire mesh items from single source from single manufacturer. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M, "Structural Welding Code -Steel." 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel." WIRE MESH PARTITIONS 10605-1 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING � f � A. Deliver wire mesh items cratedto provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Use vented plastic. B. Inventory wire mesh partition door hardware on receipt and provide secure lockup for wire mesh partition door hardware delivered to Project site. s 1. Tag each item or package separately with identification and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. �' C. Deliver keys to Owner in person, by registered mail or overnight package service. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with wire mesh units by field measurements before fabrication. � PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS �� £ A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the � following: � ' # 1. Acorn Wire 8� Iron Works, Inc. 2. American Woven Wire Corporation. 3. Jesco Industries, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel W ire: ASTM A 510. B. Steel Plates, Channels, Angles, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. € C. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. D. Panel-to-Panel Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard steel bolts, nuts, and washers. E. Postinstalled Expansion Anchors: With capability to sustain, without failure, load imposed � within factors of safety indicated, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Carbon Steel: Zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm)for r Class SC 1 service condition (mild). 2. For Postinstalled Anchors in Concrete: Capability to sustain, without failure, a load F equal to four times the loads imposed. � � � � WIRE MESH PARTITIONS 10605-2 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � �. FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 F. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20. 2.3 STANDARD-DUTY WIRE MESH PARTITIONS A. Mesh: 0.135-inch diameter, intermediate-crimp steel wire woven into 1-1/2-inch diamond mesh. B. Vertical Panel Framing: 1-1/4-by-5/8-by-0.097-inch cold-rolled, C-shaped steel channels with 1/4-inch diameter bolt holes spaced not more than 18 inches o.c. along center of framing. C. Posts for 90-Degree Corners: 1-1/4-by-1-1/4-by-1/8-inch steel angles with 1/4-inch diameter bolt holes aligning with bolt holes in vertical framing;with floor anchor clips. D. Line Posts: 3-inchby-4.1-Ib or 3-1/2-by-1-1/4-by-0.127-inch steel channels; with 5-by-18- by-1/4-inch steel base plates punched for attachment to floor. E. Swinging Doors: Fabricated from same mesh as partitions, with framing fabricated from 1- 1/4-by-1/2-by-1/8-inch steel channels or C-channels, banded with 1-1/4-by-1/8-inch flat steel bar cover plates on 4sides, and with 1/8-inch thick angle strike bar and cover on strike jamb. .. 1. Hinges: Full-surface type, 3-by-3-inch steel, 1-1/2 pairs per door; bolted, riveted, or welded to door and jamb framing. 2. Cylinder Lock: Mortise type with manufacturer's standard cylinder; operated by key outside and lever inside. a. Provide two (2) keys. F. Finish for Uncoated Ferrous Steel: Hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate wire mesh items from components of sizes not less than those indicated. Use larger-sized components as recommended by wire mesh item manufacturer. As required for complete installation, provide bolts, hardware, and accessories with manufacturer's standard finishes. 1. Fabricate wire mesh items to be readily disassembled. 2. Welding: Weld corner joints of framing and grind smooth, leaving no evidence of joint B. Standard-Duty Wire Mesh Partitions: Fabricate wire mesh partitions with cutouts for pipes, ducts, beams, and other items indicated. Finish edges of cutouts to provide a neat, protective edge. 1. Mesh: Securely clinch mesh to framing. 2. Framing: Fabricate framing with mortise and tenon corner construction. WIRE MESH PARTITIONS 10605-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO _ __. � a � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � a. Provide horizontal stiffeners as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by °v� ; panel height and as recommended by wire mesh partition manufacturer. Weld �` horizontal stiffeners to vertical framing. r: b. Fabricate partition and door framing with slotted holes for connecting adjacent ; panels. ° : � 3. Fabricate wire mesh partitions with bottom horizontal framing flush with finished floor. � 4. Doors: Align bottom of door with bottom of adjacent panels. a. For doors that do not extend full height of partition, provide transom over door, ` fabricated from same mesh and framing as partition panels. � 5. Partition Height: 84 inches unless otherwise indicated. ° z 6. Hardware Preparation: Mortise, reinforce, drill, and tap doors and framing as required � to install hardware. i: 2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS � � A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. � B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. ; � k PART 3-EXECUTION � � � ; 3.1 EXAMINATION � A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine floors for suitable conditions where wire mesh items will be installed. #' C. Examine walls to which wire mesh items will be attached for properly located blocking, grounds, and other solid backing for attachment of support fasteners. � f. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. f I: 3.2 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS ERECTION � A. Anchor wire mesh partitions to floor with 3/8-inch diameter, postinstalled expansion anchors at 12 inches o.c. through floor shoes located at each post and corner. Adjust wire mesh partition posts in floor shoes to achieve level and plumb installation. � B. Anchor wire mesh partitions to walls at 12 inches o.c. through back comer panel framing and as follows: � � � � z WIRE MESH PARTITIONS 10605-4 ; OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � ;. 4, � £' � f { FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shieids and hanger or lag bolts. C. Secure top capping bars to top framing channels with 1/4-inch diameter "U" bolts spaced not more than 28 inches o.c. D. Provide line posts at locations indicated or, if not indicated, as follows: 1. For partitions that are 7 to 9 feet high, spaced at 15 to 20 feet o.c. E. Install doors complete with door hardware. F. Bolt accessories to wire mesh partition framing. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust doors to operate smoothly and easily, without binding or warping. Adjust hardware to function smoothly. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding. B. Remove and replace defective work including doors and framing that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 10605 � I � WIRE MESH PARTITIONS 10605-5 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � - � � � �. FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � `'� � �; � f: �- z z i # e 3 a i i i' s �: �> t: � S � Y � �¢ # E t : � . !: _ r t (; � � � � � F � p� E � � F € $ � � t f S, ' � WIRE MESH PARTITIONS 10605-6 fr :i OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � � � � E; FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 10801 -TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 3. Private-use bathroom accessories. 8. Custodial accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS B. Product Data: For each rype of product indicated. Include the following: 1. Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. �� 5. Manufacturer's warranty. D. Product Schedu(e: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1. Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings. 2. Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings. E. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. I i PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.2 MATERIALS F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2.5 PRIVATE-USE BATHROOM ACCESSORIES � ; � x A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. � Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. American Bathroom Accessories, Inc. 2. Basco, Inc. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. ' 4. Franklin Brass Manufacturing Co. 5. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO) ; 6. Ginger; GUSA, Inc. 7. Seachrome Corporation. . , i+�di�ate� � C. Shower Curtain Rod: 1. Basis-of-Desiqn Product: Bobrick B-6107, 60 inches lonq. D. Toilet Tissue Holder: k � 1. Basis-of-Desian Product: Franklin Brass 4008PC. E. Towel Bar: � $ i 1. Basis-of-Desiqn Product: Franklin Brass 4018PC, 18 inches lonq. � � 2.10 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. � Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable � r product by one of the following: � ; 1. A&J Washroom Accessories, Inc. � 2. American Specialties, Inc. ' 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4. Bradley Corporation. � 5. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO). 2 B. Utility Shelf: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-224 f , 2.11 FABRICATION � A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang � doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed r anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates. ` t � TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 -2 F :r OZ Architecture Boulder, CD 7 � £ i � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. 32 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Ad'ust accessories for unencumbered smooth o eration. Re lace dama ed or defective 1 , P P 9 items. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. END OF SECTION 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 -3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � �: FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 ` � F i S �. S 3 i f. S i > 4: s g i � � 1: i: i. f E 4 t' ? � TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 -4 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � SECTION 11150 -PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 2. Vehicle detectors. 9. Access control units. B. Related Sections: 2. Division 2 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement"for concrete driveway and approach paving. 4. Division 8 Section "Sectional Doors" for doors interlocked to parking control equipment. � 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Parking Control System: Intended to be used for the following types of parking management: 1. Resident Parking: Parking garage access for residents only, with entry gained by a vehicle- affixed active card read by long range proximiry reader, and exit by vehicle detector signal to activate garage sectional door. . 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for parking control equipment. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For parking control equipment. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For parking control equipment to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 11150-1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � r 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE � ` g M' � A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and � � approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain parking control equipment from single source from single z manufacturer. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. � PART 2 - PRODUCTS ` 2.1 MATERIALS E. Anchorages: Anchor bolts, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M and � ASTM F 2329. 2.3 VEHICLE DETECTORS t A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering � products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: � �� 4. Engineered Parking Systems, Inc. � C. Vehicle Loop Detector System: Provide self-tuning electronic presence detector with � adjustable detection pattems, adjustable sensitivity and frequency settings, and panel ; indicator light designed to detect presence or transit of a vehicle over an embedded loop of wire and to emit signal activating gate-arm operator. Include automatic closing timer with � � adjustable time delay before closing, timer cut-off switch, and vehicle loop detector ` designed to open and close parking garage sectional door. Provide number of loops � consisting of multiple strands of wire, number of tums, loop size, and method of placement at location shown on Drawings, as recommended in writing by detection system �' manufacturer for function indicated. ;: r: 2. Factory-Formed Loop: Wire, preformed in size indicated; sryle for pave-over r , installation. 3. System PerFormance: Capable of the following: ; a. Recognize two vehicles within 6 inches of each other on standard-sized loop. b. Recognize vehicle direction by detecting vehicle moving from one loop to s another. d. Continuous diagnostic monitoring for intermittently operating and failed loops. e. Crosstalk test befinreen adjacent loops. � 2.11 ACCESS CONTROL UNITS ` � A. General: Provide access control unit that activates parking garage overhead coiling door. ,,� PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 11150-2 � ' OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: f. Engineered Parking Systems, Inc. 3. Unit Housing: Fabricate from welded cold-rolled steel or aluminum sheet with weatherproof front access panel equipped with flush-mounted lock and two keys. Provide face-lighted unit fully visible at night. a. Steel Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel coating system. B. Card Reader Controlled Unit: Functions only when authorized card is presented. 1. System: Programmable, multiple-code capability permitting validating or voiding of individual cards. 4. Reader: Proximity type for proximity cards. 5. Operation: Standalone . 7. Mounting: Wall . 8. Number of Cards: 30. 2.12 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range . 2.13 STEEL FINISHES . A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with the following: 1. ASTM A 123/A 123M for iron and steel parking control equipment. 2. ASTM A 153/A 153M and ASTM F 2329 for iron and steel hardware for parking control equipment. B. Galvanized-Steel and Steel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard finro-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range . PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, including equipment bases; accurate placement, PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 11150-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO § � i FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET ; VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 ;' pattern, and orientation of anchor bolts; critical dimensions; and other conditions affecting � performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in for electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before ; parking control equipment installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION ' A. General: Install parking control equipment as required for a complete and integrated � installation. 1. Rough-in electrical connections according to requirements specified in Division 16 ` Sections. � C. Vehicle Loop Detectors: Bury and seal wire loop at locations indicated on Drawings according to manufacturer's written instructions. Connect to parking control equipment f, operated by detector. G. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." £ H. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding." �� 3.4 FIELD QUAUTY CONTROL � ; A. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and � inspections. t ; B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized senrice representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including ' connections. C. Perform tests and inspections. D. Tests and Inspections: T 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. a E. Parking control equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. a A � 4 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 11150-4 � OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust parking control equipment to function smoothly and lubricate as recommended by � manufacturer. B. Confirm that locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding. C. After completing installation of exposed, factory finished parking control equipment, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain parking control equipment. END OF SECTION 11150 � � PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 11150-5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO i � � Y t T � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � �. � , � � ; � ; t f � i E [ 't i i 3 C .. �. r i t � 3 � : E • i � k S � t � � ' E PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 11150-6 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 11451 -RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Cooking equipment including: a. Electric ranges. � 1) Freestanding. 2 2) Drop- in/slide- in. b. Microwave wall/built- in ovens with integral range/cooktop exhaust. c. Countertop microwave ovens. d. Exhaust hoods. 2. Refrigeration equipment including: a. Refrigerator/freezers. 3. Cleaning appliances including: a. Dishwashers. � . . C. Related Sections include the following: � 4. Division 12 Section "Residential Casework" for standard cabinets and countertops that receive residential appliances. 6. Division 15 Sections for drainage and vent piping connections to residential appliances. 8. Division 15 Sections for kitchen sinks and waste disposers. 10. Division 16 Sections for services and connections to residential appliances. 1.2 SUBMITTALS B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include operating characteristics, dimensions of individual appliances, and finishes for each appliance. D. Appliance Schedule: For appliances; use same designations indicated on Drawings. E. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that products comply with requirements. H. Maintenance Data: For each product to include in maintenance manuals. RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 -1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � $ � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 I. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. � � f 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Source Limitations: Obtain residential appliances through one source from a single k manufacturer. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer.Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for product's aesthetic effects and k performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, ° alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one $ another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field � testing, and in-service performance. � D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following product certifications: ; 2. UL and NEMA: Provide electrical components required as part of residential appliances that are listed and labeled by UL and that comply with applicable NEMA standards. E. Regulatory Requirements, Accessibility: Where residential appliances are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1. . � 1. Tvpe A compliant requirements per ICC/ANSI A 117.1-2003 shall be met: � � Controls at ranqe are front mounted and shall not require reachinq across � 2 burner. � 2. Refriqerator/Freezer requirements aer 1003.12.6.6. � t G. Energy Ratings: Provide residential appliances that carry labels indicating energy-cost , . analysis (estimated annual operating costs) and efficiency information as required by the FTC Appliance Labefing Rule. ` f 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of each appliance specified agrees to repair or replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials or workmanship within warranty period indicated by reference to specific ' manufacturers and models. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: � � RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 -2 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � f t d � S , e FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 1. Product(s): Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product(s) indicated � 2.3 COOKING APPLIANCES A Electric Ranpe: 1. Freestandinq Electric Ranqe: Whirlpool RF263LXTB. 2. Drop-in/Slide- In Electric Ranqe: Whirlpool RY160XTB. B. Microwave Wall/ Built- In Oven with Inteqral Ranpe/ Cooktop Exhaust: Whirlpool WMH1162XVB. C. Countertop Microwave Oven: Whirlqool MT4155SP6. D. Exhaust Hood: Whirlpool UXT4030AAB. 2.4 REFRIGERATION APPLIANCES A Refriqerator/Freezer: Whirlpool W8TXNWFWB. B. Refriqerator/Freezer (ADA- compliant for use at Tvpe "A" Livinq Units): Whirlpool ET8WTKXK6. 2.5 CLEANING APPLIANCES A. Dishwasher: Whirlpool DU850SWPB. 2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Finishes: Provide appliances with finishes indicated complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application, baking, color, gloss, and minimum dry film thickness for painted finishes; and ground and polished stainless- steel surfaces for uniform, directior►ally textured finish. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 -3 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 # �: B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of pipir►g connections � before equipment installation. G C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. � s 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are completely concealed. C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment. � D. Utilities: Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 for plumbing and electrical requirements. t' � 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Test each item of residential appliances to verify proper operation. Make necessary � adjustments. B. Verify that accessories required have been furnished and installed. � � C. Remove packmg matenal from residential appliances and leave units in clean condition, _ ready for operation. � ; END OF SECTION 11451 � _ ! t � i t 4 t f �' i � � � � 5 � 2 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11451 -4 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 12356-RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Kitchen cabinets. 2. Vanity cabinets. B. Related Sections include the following: II� 1. Division 6 Section "InteriorArchitectural Woodwork". 5. Division 12 Section "Residential Appliances". II, 6. Division 15 Plumbing Sections for sinks and plumbing fittings. 1.2 DEFINITIONS . A. Ex osed SurFaces of Cabinets: Surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed P , including visible surfaces in open cabinets or behind glass doors. ' B. Semiexposed Surfaces of Cabinets: Surfaces behind opaque doors or drawer fronts, including interior faces of doors and interiors and sides of drawers. Bottoms of wall cabinets are defined as"semiexposed." C. Concealed Surfaces of Cabinets: Surfaces not usually visible after installation, including sleepers, web frames, dust panels, bottoms of drawers, and ends of cabinets installed directly against and completely concealed by walls or other cabinets. Tops of wall cabinets and utility cabinets are defined as"concealed." 1.3 SUBMITTALS B. Product Data: For the following: 1. Cabinets. 2. Cabinet hardware. C. Shop Drawings: For cabinets. Include plans, elevations, details, and attachments to other work. Show materials, finishes, filler panels, hardware, and cutouts. Show blocking required for installation. E. Samples for Verification: 1. Wood-veneered panels with transparent finish, 8 by 10 inches, for each species. 2. Solid wood with transparent finish, 50 sq. in., for each species. 3. Solid wood trim with transparent finish, 8 inches long, for each species. RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 12356- 1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET ' VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 ; 5. Urethane-coated-laminate decorative panels for cabinet interior finish, 8 by 10 inches. � ' � � ' � � F. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of casework certifying that products � furnished comply with requirements. � 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE B. Source Limitations for Cabinets: Obtain cabinets through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Quality Standards: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the following standards: 1. Cabinets: KCMA A161.1. [� a. KCMA Certification: Provide cabinets with KCMA's "Certified Cabinet" seal = affixed in a semiexposed location of each unit and showing compliance with the above standard. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS � A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install casework until building is enclosed,wet- � work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. � � B. Established Dimensions: Where casework is indicated to fit to other construction, establish ;' dimensions for areas where casework is to fit. Coordinate construction to ensure that � z actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. Provide fillers and scribes to : allow for trimming and fitting. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of blocking, hanging strips, and other devices and { reinforcement in partitions for support of casework. ; i B. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate casework. PART2-PRODUCTS ` 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering t products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Aristokraft Cabinetry. # b. Ultracraft Cabinetry. � � , REStDENTIAL CASEWORK 12356-2 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 2.3 CABINET MATERIALS A. General: 1. Hardwood Lumber: Kiln dried to 7 percent moisture content. 2. Softwood Lumber: Kiln dried to 10 percent moisture content. 3. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1. 4. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 5. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD. 6. Hardboard: AHA A135.4, Class 1 Tempered. B. Exposed Materials: 1. Exposed Wood Species: Oak. � a. Select materials for compatible color and grain. Do not use two adjacent exposed surfaces that are noticeably dissimilar in color, grain, figure, or natural character markings. b. Staining and Finish: As indicated by manufacturer's designations . 2. Solid Wood: Clear hardwood lumber of species indicated,free of defects. 3. Plywood: Hardwood plywood with face veneer of species indicated, with Grade A faces and Grade C backs of same species as faces. C. Semiexposed Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. �ef�aese� Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with manufacturer's proprietarv urethane- coated laminate �Mer�all�-#�sed; � . a. Provide material finished on both sides for shelves, dividers, drawer bodies, and other components with two semiexposed surfaces. . , . c. Colors: As selected by Architect from cabinet manufacturer's full range . D. Concealed Materials: Solid wood or plywood, of any hardwood or softwood species, with no defects affecting strength or utility; particleboard; medium-density fiberboard; or hardboard. �2.4 CABINET HARDWARE 2 A. General: Manufacturer's standard units complying with BHMA A156.9, of type, size, style, material, and finish as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. C. Hinges: Concealed Euroqean-stvle self-closinq hinqes . D. Drawer Guides: Epoxy-coated-metal, self-closing drawer guides; designed to prevent rebound when drawers are closed; with nylon-tired, ball-bearing rollers; and complying with BHMA A156.9, Type B05011 or B05091. RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 12356-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO i F € FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET k VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 2.5 CABINETS � ¢ A. Basis of Desiqn Product: The desiqn for cabinets is based on Aristokraft Cabinetrv; "Oakwood" stvle, square doors, "standard" construction. Subiect to compliance with repuirements, provide the named product or a comparable product bv another �2 residential casework manufacturer acceptable to Architect. ` , 1. Comparable product submittals: Submit as substitution in compliance with Division 1 Section "Product Requirements". . . ; • i � C. Face Stvle: Reveal overlav; door and drawer faces partiailY cover cabinet fronts. ; F. Cabinet Style: Frameless . � Door and Drawer Fronts: ' , . olid-wood stiles and ' rails, 3/4 inch thick, with veneer-faced pivwood center panels. : Q. Exposed Cabinet End Finish: Wood veneer. 1. Colors: a. Kitchen Casework: Natural. b. Bathroom Casework: Saddle. � : ;' PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION � A. Install cabinets with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces; use concealed shims. � Where cabinets abut other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips, scribe strips, and moldings in finish to match cabinet face. B. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are aligned. `' Complete installation of hardware and accessories as indicated. � i C. Install cabinets level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet. ; D. Fasten cabinets to adjacent units and to backing. 1. Wood Framing: Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not less than 24 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch ¢ penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips. ; 2. Cold- Formed Metal Framing: Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not less than 24 inches o.c., with toggle bolts through metal backing behind gypsum board. � � RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 12356-4 ` OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � , � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust cabinets and hardware so doors and drawers are centered in openings and operate smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer. B. Clean casework on exposed and semiexposed surFaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 12356 . RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK 12356-5 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � f s � [ $ � t � t % i � i t � � 6 I; 's � S 4 ; i �. � � L' S 3 I FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 12491 - HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS PART1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Horizontal louver blinds with aluminum slats at the following locations: a. Living Units exterior windows and sliding glass (patio)doors. b. Other locations indicated. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for mounting horizontal louver blinds and accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS .. A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. D. Sam les for Verification: For each e and color of horizontal louver blind indicated. P tYP 1. Slat: Not less than 12 inches long. 4. Valance: Full-size unit, not less than 12 inches wide. E. Window Treatment Schedule: For horizontal louver blinds. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. • H. Maintenance Data: For horizontal louver blinds to include in maintenance manuals. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain horizontal louver blinds through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide horizontal louver blinds with the fire-test- response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Flame-Resistance Ratings: Passes NFPA 701. D. Product Standard: Provide horizontal louver blinds complying with WCSC A 100.1. HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12491 -1 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � � �: 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 4 � � A. Deliver horizontal louver blinds in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product � name, fire-test-response characteristics, and location of installation using same { designations indicated on Drawings and in a window treatment schedule. � 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS � � � A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install horizontal louver blinds until construction and wet s and dirty finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient � temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when `� occupied for its intended use. B. Field Measurements: Where horizontal louver blinds are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before ` fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operable � glazed units' operation hardware throughout the entire operating range. Notify Architect of g discrepancies. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 9' f PART 2 -PRODUCTS ' .. �' � 2.1 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS, ALUMINUM SLATS `' � #: C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product f indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: ; � 1. Hunter pouglas. � � 2. Levolor, a Newell Rubbermaid Company. � 3. Springs Window Fashions Division, Inc. D. Slats: Aluminum; alloy and temper recommended by producer for type of use and finish indicated; with crowned profile and radiused corners. ; 2. Width: 1 inch . �: a. Spacing: Not more than every 0.77 inch . ` Y 3. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 0.006 inch . '' i 4. Finish: One color . F � 's` a. lonized Coating: Antistatic, dust-repellent, baked polyester finish. _ L E. Headrail: Formed steel or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled;fully enclosing operating mechanisms on three sides and the following: k � 1. Capacity: One blind per headrail . � 2. Integrated Headrail/Valance: Curved face . 3. Light-blocking lower back lip. � 4. Tilt limiter with preselected degree settings. ,,� ` HORIZONTAL LOUVER BUNDS 12491 -2 ;: OZ Architecture Boulder,CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 F. Bottom Rail: Formed-steel or extruded-aluminum tube, with piastic or metal capped ends and top contoured to match crowned shape of slat ; with enclosed ladders and tapes to prevent contact with sill. H. Ladders: Evenly spaced to prevent long-term slat sag. 1. For Blinds with Nominal Slat Width 1 Inch or Less: Braided string. J. Lift Cords: Manufacturer's standard. K. Tilt Control: Enclosed worm-gear mechanism, slip clutch or detachable wand preventing overrotation, and linkage rod, and the following: 1. Tilt Operation: Manual with clear plastic wand . 2. Length of Tilt Control: Length required to make operation convenient from floor level 3. Tilt: Full. L. Lift Operation: Manual, cord lock; locks pull cord to stop blind at any position in ascending or descending travel. P. Mounting: End mounting , permitting easy removal and replacement without damaging blind or adjacent surfaces and finishes; with spacers and shims required for blind placement and alignment indicated. .. 1. Provide intermediate support brackets if end support spacing exceeds spacing recommended by manufacturer for weight and size of blind. Q. Hold-Down Brackets and Hooks or Pins: Manufacturer's standard. S. Colors, Textures, Patterns, and Gloss: As indicated in the Interior Finish Legend in the Drawings. 2.4 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLIND FABRICATION A. Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials. 1. Lift-and-Tilt Mechanisms: With permanently lubricated moving parts. B. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F: 1. Blind Units Installed befinreen (inside) Jambs: Width equal to 1/4 inch per side or 1/2 inch total, plus or minus 1/8 inch, less than jamb-to jamb dimension of opening in which each blind is installed. Length equal to 1/4 inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch, less than head-to-sill dimension of opening in which each blind is installed. C. Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of blind, for supporting headrail,valance, and operating hardware, and for hardware position and blind mounting method indicated. HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12491 -3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO # f FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET �' VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 D. Installation Fasteners: No �fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal � noncorrosive to blind hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting substrate; and supporting blinds and accessories under conditions of normal use. E. Color-Coated Finish: � � E 1. Metal: For components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard baked finish t complying with manufacturer's written instn.�ctions for surface preparation including ; pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness. F. Component Color: Provide rails, cords, ladders, and exposed-to-view metal and plastic matching or coordinating with slat color, unless otherwise indicated. � PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.+ EXAMINATION K A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. � 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install horizontal touver blinds level and plumb and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions, and located so exterior slat edges in any position are not closer than 2 inches to interior face of glass. Install intermediate support as required � to prevent deflection in headrail. Allow clearances between adjacent blinds and for operating glazed opening's operation hardware if any. B. Flush Mounted: Install horizontal louver blinds with slat edges flush with finish face of f. opening if slats are tilted open. � 3.3 ADJUSTING s A. Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free of binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. , :. _ ; 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean horizontal louver blind surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer � and Installer, that ensure that horizontal louver blinds are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. � HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12491 -4 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 C. Replace damaged horizontal louver blinds that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 12491 I �I � HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12491 -5 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO . � � $ z: E � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET < VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � � 3 ¢ C � � 4 I � g � t' S } 3 � HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12491 -6 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 SECTION 13852 - DIGITAL,ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire-alarm control unit. 2. Manual fire-alarm boxes. 3. System smoke detectors. 4. Carbon monoxide detectors. 5. Heat detectors. 6. Notification appliances-speakers and strobes. 7. Magnetic door holders. 8. Addressable interFace device. 9. Digital alarm communicator transmitter. 10. System printer. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. LED: .Light-emitting diode. B. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Noncoded, UL-listed addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission, dedicated to fire-alarm service only. B. Noncoded addressable system, with automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors and multiplexed signal transmission, dedicated to fire-alarm service only. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General Submittal Requirements: 1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to Architect � 2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications: DIGITAL,ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 13852-1 BGCE VAIL,CO � f u i § FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design. � b. NICET-certified fire-alarm technician, Level III minimum. c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction. 4 � B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. ' C. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the � "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems"Chapter in NFPA 72. _ 2. fnclude voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits. 3. Include battery-size calculations. , 4. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector, verifying that each detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating. _ 5. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air- ` conditioning ducts, drawn to scale and coordinating installation of duct smoke £ detectors and access to them. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement ; and support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote status and alarm ' indicators. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations. .. 6. Include voice/alarm signaling-service equipment rack or console layout, � grounding schematic, amplifier power calculation, and single-line connection " diagram. 7. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each � : addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits. ? s D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For smoke and heat detectors indicated to comply with 3. performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and ; sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. . _ 1. Drawings showing the location of each smoke and heat detector, ratings of each, � and installation details as needed to comply with listing conditions of the detector. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacing and 4, - sensitivity of detection, complying with NFPA 72. r t � E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. ;' F. Field quality-control reports. G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include � in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data include the following: i; � } 1. Comply with the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72. E; 2. Provide "Record of Completion Documents" according to NFPA 72 article ; "Permanent Records" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance"Chapter. `` 3. Record copy of site-specific software. � � : DIGITAL,ADDRESSABLE FIRE—ALARM SYSTEM 13852—2 ; BGCE VAIL, CO �: ; FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 4. Provide "Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records" according to NFPA 72 article of the same name and include the following: a. Frequency of testing of installed components. b. Frequency of inspection of installed components. c. Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance. d. Manufacturer's user training manuals. 5. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements. 6. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit. H. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: 1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files. 3. Device address list. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire- alarm Level III technician. C. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Obtain fire-alarm system from single source from single manufacturer. Components shall be compatible with, and operate as, an extension of existing system. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and �Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in • NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. E. All equipment shall be UL listed. �I 1.7 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT A. Comply with UL 864. B. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for two years. ' C. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or revised licenses for use of software. DIGITAL,ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 13852-3 BGCE VAIL, CO � ` � � � t � s � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET ` VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 �' � fi 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS �: < A. Fumish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with ` protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. � � 1. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no j fewer than 1 unit. � 2. Smoke Detectors, Fire Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of � each type installed, but no fewer than 1 unit of each type. 3. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed, � but no fewer than 1 unit of each type. 4. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked and tamperproofed components. ` 5. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: Two of each type installed. _ t: j PART 2 - PRODUCTS ` 2.1 MANUFACTURERS � A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of ; the following: .. B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide equipment by one of the following: � } 1. NOTIFIER; a Honeywell company. � 2. EST 3. SimplexGrinnell LP; a Tyco Intemational company. , 4. Equivalent. , �: 2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices: � � 1. Manual stations. ' 2. Heat detectors. � 3. Smoke detectors-common area. 4. Duct smoke detectors. 5. Automatic sprinkler system water flow. 6. Heat detectors in elevator shaft and pit. 7. Fire-extinguishing system operation. ; B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions: 1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances. r 2. Identify alarm at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators. `: 3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station. t 4. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths. � ; DIGITAL,ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 13852-4 BGCE VAIL,CO � F $ FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 5. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders. 6. Activate voice/alarm communication system. 7. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-alarm mode. 8. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems. 9. Recall elevators to primary or alternate recall floors. 10. Record events in the system memory. C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions: 1. Valve supervisory switch. 2. Low-air-pressure switch of a dry-pipe sprinkler system. 3. Elevator shunt-trip supervision. 4. Residential unit smoke detector. 5. Residential unit carbon monoxide detector. D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions: 1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits. 2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal- initiating devices. 3. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit. 4. Ground or a single break in fire-alarm control unit intemal circuits. 5. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit. 6. Break in standby battery circuitry. 7. Failure of battery charging. 8. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator. 9. Low-air-pressure switch operation on a dry-pipe or preaction sprinkler system. E. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Initiate notification appliance and annunciate at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators. Record the event on system printer. 2.3 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT A. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit: 1. Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, complying with UL 864 and listed and labeled by an NRTL. a. System software and programs shall be held in flash electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), retaining the information through failure of primary and secondary power supplies. b. Include a real-time clock for time annotation of events on the event recorder and printer. 2. Addressable initiation devices that communicate device identity and status. DIGITAL,ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 13852-5 BGCE VAIL,CO ; # � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET ; VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � a. Smoke sensors shall additionally communicate sensitivity setting and allow � , for adjustment of sensitivity at fire-alarm control unit. ; b. Temperature sensors shall additionally test for and communicate the sensitivity range of the device. 3. Addressable control circuits for operation of inechanical equipment. B. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interFace between human operator at fire-alarm control unit and addressable system components including � annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status ` messages and the programming and control menu. ` 1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type,40, 80 characters, minimum. � 2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control commands. � C. Circuits: 1. Initiating Device, Notification Appliance, and Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class B. D. Notification Appliance Circuit: Operation shall provide voice evacuation. E. Elevator Recall: �� 1. Smoke detectors at the following locations shall initiate automatic elevator recall. � a. Elevator lobby detectors except the lobby detector on the designated floor. € b. Smoke detector in elevator machine room. i c. Smoke detectors in elevator hoistway. 2. Elevator lobby detectors located on the designated recall floors shall be = programmed to move the cars to the alternate recall floor. � 3. Water-flow alarm connected to sprinkler in an elevator shaft and elevator s machine room shall shut down elevators associated with the location without time ;: delay. � �- a. Water-flow switch associated with the sprinkler in the elevator pit may have � a delay to allow elevators to move to the designated floor. F. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity t. settings, and change those settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive, ; time-scheduled, and automated changes in sensitivity of specific detector groups. ' Record sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes in system memory, and print out the final adjusted values on system printer. G. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote alarm station. � : � f { DIGITAL,ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 13852-6 k' BGCE VAIL, CO � i s * FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 H. Voice/Alarm Signaling Service: Central emergency communication system with redundant microphones, preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators shall be provided. 1. Indicated number of alarm channels for automatic, simultaneous transmission of different announcements to different zones or for manual transmission of announcements by use of the central-control microphone. Amplifiers shall comply with UL 1711 and be listed by an NRTL. i a. Allow the application of and evacuation signal to indicated number of zones I and, at same time, allow voice paging to the other zones selectively or in any combination. b. Programmable tone and message sequence selection. c. Standard digitally recorded messages for"Evacuation" and "All Clear." d. Generate tones to be sequenced with audio messages of type recommended by NFPA 72 and that are compatible with tone patterns of notification appliance circuits of fire-alarm control unit. 2. Status Annunciator: Indicate the status of various voice/alarm speaker zones. 3. Preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators shall automatically transfer to backup units, on primary equipment failure. I. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. 1. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power-supply module rating. � J. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and automatic transfer switch. 1. Provide 24 hours standby, 15 minute alarm battery backup. 2.4 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES A. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box. 1. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever type; with integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status(normal, alarm, or trouble)to fire-alarm control unit. 2. Station Reset: Key-or wrench-operated switch. 3. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an integral battery-powered audible horn intended to discourage false-alarm operation. 4. Weatherproof Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. DIGITAL,ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 13852-7 BGCE VAIL, CO �' � ; s � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 ; 2.5 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS � � � A. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors: � ,_: �: 1. Compiy with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal. ` � 2. Provide addressable, two-wire smoke detectors in common areas. ` 3. Provide addressable, four-wire smoke detectors with sounder bases in residential Y units. � 4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be � mounted in a twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals $ ` in the fixed base for connection to building wiring. � 5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation � to restore them to normal operation. 6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type indicating detector has operated and power-on status. k 7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog- F addressable type, individually monitored at fire-alarm control unit for calibration, � sensitivity, and alarm condition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by fire- s' alarm control unit. x € a. Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic shall be selectable at fire-alarm ;: control unit for 15 or 20 deg F per minute. t b. Fixed-temperature sensing shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and c shall be settable at fire-alarm control unit to operate at 135 or 155 deg F. �' c. Provide multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor. � `� f B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: � � 1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be ` � able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting. . 2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall F be able to manually access the following for each detector: ! a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. ; e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.). _ C. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A. 1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be € = able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting. � 2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall � be able to manually access the following for each detector: ; ° a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. # e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.). � � DIGITAL,ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 13852-8 � � BGCE VAIL,CO �: � f � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 3. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed for use with the supplied detector. 4. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity. 5. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied. 6. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit. 2.6 HEAT DETECTORS A. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521. B. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Fixed temperature rate of rise. 1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble)to fire-alarm control unit. 2.7 CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTORS A. Carbon monoxide detector shall be a System Sensor model number C01224T, listed to Underwriters Laboratories UL 2075 for Gas and Vapor Detectors and Sensors. The detector shall be equipped with a .sounder and a trouble relay. The detector's base shall be able to mount to a single-gang electrical box or direct (surface) mount to the wall or ceiling. The detector shall provide dual color LED indication, which blinks to indicate normal standby, alarm, or end-of-life. When the sensor supervision is in a trouble condition, the detector shall send a trouble signal to the panel. When the detector gives a trouble or end-of-life signal, the detector shall be replaced. The detector shall provide a means to test CO gas entry into the CO sensing cell. The detector shall provide this with a test mode that accepts CO gas from a test agent and alarms immediately upon sensing CO entry. , B. The carbon monoxide detector shall be connected to and monitored by the fire alarm system by means of an addressable monitor module. 2.8 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification appliance signal circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections. 1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices (speaker/strobes) in a single-mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections. B. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch- high letters on the lens. DIGITAL,ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 13852-9 BGCE VAIL, CO ` � � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET � VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 = 1. Rated Light Output: � � a. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field. F 2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated. ; 3. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be � determined with guards in place. � 4. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units. ; 5. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals. _ 6. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, white. z C. Voice/Tone Notification Appliances: 1. Appliances shall comply with UL 1480 and shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL. � Y 2. High-Range Units: Rated 2 to 15 W. _ � 3. Low-Range Units: Rated 1 to 2 W. 4. Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to acoustical environment of ` speaker location. } 2.9 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS A. Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are :' � complete with matching doorplate. ; � �. 1. Electromagnet: Requires no more than 3 W to develop 25-Ibf holding force. - 2. Wall-Mounted Units: Flush mounted unless otherwise indicated. �: 3. Rating: 120-V ac. � � B. Material and Finish: Match door hardware. # � � 2.10 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR ` A. Description: Annunciator functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit for ' alarm, supervisory, and trouble indications. Manual switching functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit, including acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and � testing. ` 1. Mounting: Flush cabinet, NEMA 250, Type 1. B. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display and LED indicating lights shall match those of fire-alarm control unit. Provide controls to acknowledge, silence, reset, and test functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals. 2.11 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE A. Description: Microelectronic monitor module, NRTL listed for use in providing a system � address for alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts. �' � �: DIGITAL,ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 13852-10 g BGCE VAIL, CO y E; � � i FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 B. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to achieve auxiliary function. 2.12 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote central station and shall comply with UL 632 and be listed and labeled by an NRTL. B. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from fire-alarm control unit and automatically capture one telephone line(s) and dial a preset number for a remote central station. When contact is made with central station(s), signals shall be transmitted. If service on line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, transmitter shall initiate a local trouble signal and transmit the signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station over the remaining line. Transmitter shall automatically report telephone service restoration to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, transmitter shall initiate the local trouble signal. C. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger. D. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station. 2.13 DEVICE GUARDS � A. Description: Welded wire mesh of size and shape for the manual station, smoke detector, gong, or other device requiring protection. 1. Facto fabricated and fumished b manufacturer of device. rY Y 2. Finish: Paint of color to match the protected device. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire-alarm equipment. B. Equipment Mounting: Install fire-alarm control unit on finished floor with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor. 1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 16 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." C. Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor. D. Smoke-or Heat-Detector Spacing: 1. Comply with NFPA 72 and manufacturer listings. DIGITAL,ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 13852-11 BGCE VAIL, CO I � _ � � � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET r VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 � � � E. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Instali sampling tubes > so they extend the full width of duct. ; F. Heat Detectors in Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with � sprinkler rating and location. � G. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling. E Install bells and homs on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating g mechanism concealed behind a grille. i x H. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and : at least 6 inches below the ceiling. t I. Fire-Alarm Control Unit: Surface mounted, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor. J. Annunciator: Install with top of panel not more than 72 inches above the finished floor. � K Comply with Town of Vail requirements for conduit installation; fire alarm wiring shall be installed in listed raceways. 3.2 CONNECTIONS ° � A. For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to doors in smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Door � Hardware." Connect hardware and devices to fire-alarm system. f i 1. Verify that hardware and devices are NRTL listed for use with fire-alarm system �; in this Section before making connections. i' ;. B. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following � . � devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 3 feet from the device ' controlled. Make an addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is ' available at the device or system being controlled. ?' 1. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems. : 2. Alarm-initiating connection to elevator recall system and components. 3. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches. 4. Supervisory connections at low-air-pressure switch of each dry-pipe sprinkler i system. ' 5. Supervisory connections at elevator shunt trip breaker. ` r � 3.3 IDENTIFICATION 4 A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit. � i DIGITAL,ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 13852-12 � BGCE VAIL,CO i _ � � � � —.� FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 3.4 GROUNDING A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and e ui ment installations, q P including connections, and to assist in testing. D. Tests and Inspections: 1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing. .. a. Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and system documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents, Preparation"Table in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of � Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter. b. Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table in the "Inspection" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components. 2. System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72. 3. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. 4. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72. E. Reacceptance Testing: PerForm reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances. F. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. G. Prepare test and inspection reports. DIGITAL,ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 13852-13 BGCE VAIL,CO i �— � � � s � S r FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET t VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � � i` H. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, ;; monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and ° inspections. � � f I. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire- alarm system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. � Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION � A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm � system. 3 i END OF SECTION 13852 „; t � i i F � �{ 1 e� e [ (I i E � � S S k _ 4 L � � DIGITAL,ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 13852-14 � BGCE VAIL, CO � _ ; � ; ; � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 13865—RADIO AMPLIFICATION SYSTEM 1.00 GENERAL A. Fumishing of labor, materials, equipment, and service necessary for the complete installation and testing, adjusting, and placing into service of the radio amplification system as specified herein and as required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction,Vail Fire and Emergency Services. B. This specification covers a radio amplification system, designed to achieve effective fire department and other emergency responder radio communications throughout the building, including all levels. Required repeater interface and frequencies are noted in this specification. C. Work included in this specification shall consist of, but is not necessarily limited to, the following items: 1. Obtain and bear the cost of necessary permits and licenses. 2. Furnish and install all equipment, wiring and accessories to ' provide a complete, operating system. 3. Ensure all FCC requirements and licenses are met and obtained. 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Three sets of submittals containing the following shall be provided to the General Contractor and Authority Having Jurisdiction prior to commencement of work. 1. Summary of system design and configuration. 2. Data sheets for all equipment including antennas, boosters, cable, enclosures and system accessories. 3. Licensing information 1.02 DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY A. The installing contractor shall be responsible for the system design. B. If the initial system installation does not achieve the required radio coverage,the installing contractor shall be held responsible for achieving signal requirements. Additional equipment and/or cables shall be provided as needed to obtain proper signal coverage. 1.03 SIGNAL AND COVERAGE REQUIREMENTS A. For purposes of this section, adequate radio coverage shall include: 1. Minimum signal strength required by Town of Vail ordinance available in 95% of the building for two-way radio communication. B. The installing contractor shall contact Vail Fire& Emergency Services operations for system specifications including frequencies, repeater information, and communication requirements. RADIO AMPLIFICATION SYSTEM 13865-1 '� BGCE VAIL, CO � � z i i FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET e VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 i � 1.04 AMPLIFICATION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION � € A. Buildings and structures shall be equipped with any of the following, in ; order to achieve the required radio coverage: 1. A Bi-Directional Antenna system with "leaky" coaxial cable run � strategically through the areas of coverage. � 2. A Bi-Directional Antenna system with supplemental distributed antennas(signal boosters)connected with coaxial cable. 3. A Bi-Directional Antenna system with supplemental distributed i antennas(signal boosters)connected with fiber optic cable. i � B. The system shall be capable of operating on an independent battery and/or generator system for a period of at least twelve(12) hours without external power input. The battery system shall automatically charge in the presence of external power input. C. There shall be no connectivity between the amplification system and fire = alarm system. a D. Altemative systems are allowed, provided proper documentation is � . submitted for approval to the Specifying Engineer and the General ' Contractor. All FCC requirements must be met. f 1.05 MANUFACTURERS � f ; A. Contractor shall choose equipment manufacturer, provided all ; _ specification requirements are met. All equipment is subject to approval ; by Specifying Engineer, General Contractor and Authority Having Jurisdiction. . f 1.06 CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES A. All radio amplification equipment shall be housed in approved enclosures. Cabinets shall NEMA 4 rated, painted steel cabinet. The Cabinet shall be > marked and/or labeled to note that it houses "Radio Amplification � Equipment". The cabinet will have a lock mechanism to keep the unit secure. � , B. All equipment must have adequate environmental controls and/or be � placed in a properly conditioned environment to meet the heating, ventilation, cooling and humidity requirements specified by equipment manufacturers. 1.07 SYSTEM MONITORING ALARM ' A. Each amplifier unit, signal booster or other hardware will have a monitoring system that monitors operation and primary power. Upon failure an audible warning device will activate in a monitored location. � RADIO AMPLIFICATION SYSTEM 13865-2 BGCE VAIL,CO � �:: FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 Clearing of this condition is the responsibility of the equipment maintenance contractor. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Employ on the job a competent superintendent for the progress and execution of the work. Labor quality shall be of high standards, conforming to standard practice as stipulated by goveming codes and standards. B. Contractor's Qualifications: Any installation, modification, or alteration of a radio amplification system shall be performed only by a person qualified to do so, as defined by the FCC and local regulations. 1.09 ACCEPTANCE TEST PROCEDURES A. Acceptance testing for this system is required, upon completion of installation. Testing shall ensure that two-way coverage is provided in 95% of the facility. B. Field strength testing instruments are to be recently calibrated(1 year) and approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. C. The gain values of all amplifiers shall be measured and the results kept on file with the building owner so that the measurements can be verified each year during the annual tests. In the event that the measurement results become lost,the building owner will be required to rerun the acceptance test to reestablish the gain values. D. A representative of the governing Fire Department will oversee the acceptance test. � E. A Certificate of Occupancy will not be issued to any structure if the building fails to comply with this section. 1.10 ANNUALTESTS A. The radio amplification system shall be subjected to an annual test. Amplifiers shall be tested to ensure that the gain is the same as it was upon initial installation and acceptance. Back-up batteries and power supplies shall be tested under load for a period of one(1) hour to verify proper operation. All other active components shall be checked to determine that they are operating within the manufacturers specifications for the intended purpose. 1.11 QUALIFICATIONS OF TESTING PERSONNEL A. All tests shall be conducted, documented, and signed by a person in possession of a current FCC GENERAL RADIOTELEPHONE OPERATOR LICENSE. Ail test records shall be retained at the inspected RADIO AMPLIFICATION SYSTEM 13865-3 BGCE VAIL, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 premises by the building owner and a copy submitted to the Authority � Having Jurisdiction. 1.12 FIRE DEPARTMENT INSPECTIONS ` A. Fire Department Radio personnel, after providing reasonable notice to the owner or his representative, shall have the right to conduct an annual test of the radio amplification system. END OF SECTION 13865 � s .. � � � E f y: � RADIO AMPLIFICATION SYSTEM 13865-4 BGCE VAIL, CO x FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 SECTION 14240 - HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes hydraulic passenger elevators. B. Related Sections include the following: 3. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices in concrete. 4. Division 4 Masonry Sections for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices in masonry and for grouting elevator entrance frames installed in masonry watls. 6. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications"for the following: a. Attachment plates and angle brackets for supporting guide-rail brackets. c. Hoist beams. d. Structural-steel shapes for subsills. e. Pit ladders. 9. Division 9 Section "Ceramic Tile"for finish flooring in elevator cars. .. 15. Division 16 Sections for electrical service for elevators to and including fused disconnect switches at machine room door. I 16. Division 16 Sections for telephone service to elevators. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions in ASME A17.1 apply to work of this Section. B. Defective Elevator Work: Operation. or control system failure, including excessive malfunctions; perFormances below specified ratings; excessive wear; unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes; unsafe conditions; need for excessive maintenance; abnormal noise or vibration; and similar unusual, unexpected, and unsatisfactory conditions. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes, and similar information. Include product data for the following: 1. Car enclosures and hoisfinray entrances. 2. Operation, control, and signal systems. B. Shop Drawings: Show plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at each landing, machine room layout, coordination with building structure, relationships with other construction, and locations of equipment and signals. Include large-scale layout of car control station. Indicate variations from specified requirements, maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of support, and maximum and average power demands. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-1 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO f � �; FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 ; D. Samples for Verification: For exposed finishes of cars, hoistway doors and frames, and � ` signal equipment; 3-inch- square Samples of sheet materials; and 4-inch lengths of running � trim members. ' � E. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoistway, pit, and machine room layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electrical service, as d shown and specified, are adequate for elevator system being provided. { ; F. Qualification Data: For Installer. 3 G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For elevators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. H. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by authorities 4 having jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use. � I. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. x J. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Service agreement specified in this Section. R 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ; � A. Installer Qualifications: Elevator manufacturer. B. Source Limitations: Obtain elevators through one source from a single manufacturer. 1. Provide major elevator components, including pump-and-tank units, plunger-cylinder � r assemblies, controllers, signal fixtures, door operators, car frames, cabs, and � entrances, manufactured by a single manufacturer. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1. D. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with Section E. Fire-Rated Hoisfinray Entrance Assemblies: Door and frame assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to ; authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at as close to neutral pressure as possible according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B. � 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING � A. Deliver, store, and handle materials, components and equipment in manufacturer's protective packaging. � B. Store materials, components, and equipment off of ground, under cover, and in a dry � location. Handle according to manufacturer's written recommendations to prevent damage, deterioration, or soiling. i � � F � �: HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-2 �� OZ Architecture Boulder, CO FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of sleeves, block outs, and items that are embedded in concrete or masonry for elevator equipment. Furnish templates and installation instructions and deliver to Project site in time for installation. C. Coordinate sequence of elevator installation with other work to avoid delaying the Work. D. Coordinate locations and dimensions of other work relating to hydraulic elevators including pit ladders, sumps, and floor drains in pits; entrance subsills; and electrical service, electrical outlets, lights, and switches in pits and machine rooms. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair, restore, or replace defective elevator work within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Senrice: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide one year's full maintenance service by.skilled employees of elevator Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of wom or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. 1. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working hours. 2. Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week emergency callback service. a. Response Time: Two hours or less. B. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Provide a continuing maintenance proposal from Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard one-year maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State senrices, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Otis Elevator Co. Model LVM3500 TR Telescoping Holeless Hydraulic Elevator, or comparable product by one of the following: 3. Schindler Elevator Corp. � 4. ThyssenKrupp Elevator. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-3 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � 4. � � d k i FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 i 2.2 SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS � ; A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard elevator systems. Where components are not i. otherwise indicated, provide standard components published by manufacturer as included in � standard preengineered elevator systems and as required for complete system. r r B. Pump Units: Positive-displacement type with a maximum of 10 percent variation between no load and full load and with minimum pulsations. Provide the following: ° t k 2. Submersible pump, with submersible squirrel-cage induction motor, suspended inside ` oil tank from vibration isolation mounts. 3. Provide motor with solid-state reduced voltage, soft starting. � C. Hydraulic Silencers: Provide hydraulic silencer containing pulsation-absorbing material in a blowout-proof housing at pump unit. ' D. Piping: Provide size, type, and weight piping recommended by manufacturer, and provide � flexible connectors to minimize sound and vibration transmissions from power unit. 2. Casing for Underground Piping: PVC pipe complying with ASTM D 1785, joined with PVC fittings complying with ASTM D 2466 and solvent cement complying with � ASTM D 2564. F F. Hydraulic Fluid: Nontoxic, readily biodegradable,fire-resistant fluid made from vegetable oil with antioxidant, anticorrosive, antifoaming, and metal-passivating additives. Hydraulic fluid is approved by elevator manufacturer for use with elevator equipment. G. Inserts: Furnish required concrete and masonry inserts and similar anchorage devices for � installing guide rails, machinery, and other components of elevator work where mstallation of t devices is specified in another Section. J. Car Frame and Platform: Welded steel units. . f K. Guides: Provide either roller guides or sliding guides at top and bottom of car and counterweight frames. If sliding guides are used, provide guide-rail lubricators or polymer- coated, nonlubricated guides. s 2.3 OPERATION SYSTEMS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation system as required to : provide type of operation system indicated. 3 B. Auxiliary Operations: In addition to primary operation system features, provide the following � operational features for elevators where indicated: � 1. Standby Power Operation: On activation of standby power, car is retumed to a ; designated floor and parked with doors open. Car can be manually put in service on standby power, either for return operation or for regular operation, by switches in control panel located at main lobby . Manual operation causes automatic operation to ?: cease. 6. Automatic Dispatching of Loaded Car: When car load exceeds 80 percent of rated capacity, doors will begin closing. � HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-4 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 7. Nuisance Call Cancel: When car calis exceed a preset number while car load is less than a predetermined weight, all car calls are canceled. Preset number of calis and predetermined weight can be adjusted. D. Security Features: Provide the following security features, where indicated. Security features shall not affect emergency firefighters' service. 2. Keyswitch Operation: Push buttons are activated and deactivated by security keyswitches at car control stations . Key is removable only in deactivated position. 2.4 DOOR REOPENING DEVICES A. Infrared Array: Provide door reopening devices with uniform array of 36 or more microprocessor-controlled, infrared light beams projecting across car entrance. Interruption of one or more of the light beams shall cause doors to stop and reopen. B. Nudging Feature: After car doors are prevented from closing for predetermined adjustable time, through activating door reopening device, a loud buzzer shall sound and doors shall begin to close at reduced kinetic energy. 2.5 FINISH MATERIALS A. General: Provide the following materials for exposed parts of elevator car enclosures, car doors, hoistway entrance doors and frames, and signal equipment as indicated. B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B, exposed, matte finish. D. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304. E. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276, Type 304. F. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304. J. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063. L. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure type complying with NEMA LD 3, Type HGS for flat applications and Type BKV for panel backing. 2.6 CAR ENCLOSURES A. General: Provide steel-framed car enclosures with nonremovable wall panels, with car roof, access doors, power door operators, and ventilation. 1. Provide standard railings complying with ASME A17.1 on car tops where required by ASME A17.1. 2. Provide finished car including materials and finishes specified below. B. Materials and Finishes: Provide manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following: 1. Subfloor: Underlayment grade, exterior plywood, 5/8-inch nominal thickness. 2. Floor Finish: Specified in a Division 9 Section . HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-5 OZ Architecture Boulder,CO . � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 i i: a: 6. Plastic-Laminate Wall Panels: Plastic laminate adhesively applied to manufacturer's � standard honeycomb core with plastic-laminate panel backing and manufacturer's standard protective edge trim. Panels have a flame-spread index of 75 or less, when ; tested according to ASTM E 84. Plastic-laminate color, texture, and pattern as selected by Architect from plastic-laminate manufacturer's full range. 7. Fabricate car with recesses and cutouts for signal equipment. • ; 8. Fabricate car door frame integrally with front wall of car. ` 10. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainless-steel sheet . ` 13. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on car doors. 14. Sills: Extruded metal,with grooved surface, 1/4 inch thick. ` 15. Luminous Ceiling: Fluorescent light fixtures and ceiling panels of translucent acrylic or other permanent rigid plastic. � 17. Handrails: Manufacturer's standard handrails, of shape, metal, and finish indicated. ` � 2.7 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard horizontal-sliding, door-and-frame hoisfinray entrances complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories. Provide frame size and profile to coordinate with hoistway wall construction. 1. Where gypsum board wall construction is indicated, provide self-supporting frames with ;; reinforced head sections. z € B. Materials and Fabrication: Provide manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following: 1. Enameled-Steel Frames: Formed from cold-rolled or hot-rolled steel sheet. Provide ;,,� with factory-applied enamel finish; colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer's 4 full range. � 5. Enameled-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. Provide with factory-applied enamel finish; colors as selected by Architect F . from manufacturer's full range. 9. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on doors matching door edges. 10. Sills: Extruded metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch thick. 11. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. i 2.8 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT ; A. General: Provide hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call has been fulfilled. Fabricate lighted elements with LEDs. B. Car Control Stations: Provide manufacturer's standard recessed car control stations. Mount in retum panel adjacent to car door, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mark buttons and switches with standard identification for required use or function that E complies with ASME A17.1. Use both tactile symbols and Braille. � 2. Provide "No Smoking" sign matching car control station, either integral with car control station or mounted adjacent to it, with text and graphics as required by authorities � having jurisdiction. �; D. Emergency Communication System: Provide system that complies with ASME A17.1 and � the U.S. Architectural 8� Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with r HYDRAUUC ELEVATORS 14240-6 # OZ Architecture Boulder, CO �' € f t FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." On activation, system dials preprogrammed number of monitoring station and identifies elevator location to monitoring station. System provides finro-way voice communication without using a handset and provides visible signals that indicate when system has been activated and when monitoring station has responded. System is contained in flush-mounted cabinet, with identification, instructions for use, and battery backup power supply. , E. Firefighters' Two-Way Telephone Communication Service: Where required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide flush-mounted cabinet or telephone jack in each car and required conductors in traveling cable for firefighters'two-way telephone communication service. F. Car Position Indicator: Provide illuminated, digital-type car position indicator, located above car door or above car control station. Also provide audible signal to indicate to passengers that car is either stopping at or passing each of the floors served. 1. Include travel direction arrows if not provided in car control station. H. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide hall push-button stations at each landing as indicated. 2. Provide vandal- resistant units with flat faceplate for mounting with body of unit recessed in wall. 3. Equip units with buttons for calling elevator and for indicating desired direction of travel. I. Hall Lanterns: Units with illuminated arrows; but provide single arrow at terminal landings. Provide the following: .. 1. Manufacturer's standard wall-mounted units,for mounting above entrance frames. J. Hall Annunciator: With each hall lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival and direction of travel. Signals sound once for up and twice for down. 1. At manufacturer's option, audible signals may be placed on car. L. Standby Power Elevator Selector Switches: Provide switches, as required by ASME A17.1, where indicated. Adjacent to switches, provide illuminated signal that indicates when normal power supply has failed. For each elevator, provide illuminated signals that indicate when they are operational and when they are at the designated emergency return level with doors open. N. Corridor Call Station Pictograph Signs: Provide signs matching hall push-button stations, with text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction, indicating that in case of fire elevators are out of service and exits should be used instead. Provide one sign at each hall push-button station, unless otherwise indicated. 2.9 ELEVATORS A. Elevator Description: 8. Type: Holeless, with cylinder configuration as required for capacity and travel distance indicated. 9. Rated �oad: 3500 Ib. 11. Rated Speed: 125 fpm. 12. Operation System: Single automatic operation. 13. Auxiliary Operations: , HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-7 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � � � � FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET c VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � a. Standby power operation. d. Automatic dispatching of loaded car. � § e. Nuisance call cancel. � h. Loaded-car bypass. � 14. Security Features: Keyswitch operation . 16. Car Enclosures: ° a. Inside Width: 80 inches from side wall to side wall. w � b. Inside Depth: 65 inches from back wall to front wall (return panels). E c. Inside Height: 95 inches to underside of ceiling. E d. Front Walls(Return Panels): Satin stainless steel, No.4 finish with integral car } door frames. e. Car Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish . _ f. Side and Rear Wall Panels: Plastic laminate . � h. Door Faces(Interior): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish . � � i. Door Sills: Aluminum, mill finish . j. Ceiling: Luminous ceiling . � k. Handrails: Manufacturer's standard rectangular ,satin stainless steel, No. 4 � finish , at rear of car. 3 17. Hoisfinray Entrances: d- a. Width: 42 inches . '� b. Height: 84 inches . � '� c. Type: Single-speed side sliding . � d. Fire-Protection Rating: 1-1/2 hours . � e. Frames : Enameled steel . g. Doors : Enameled steel . � i. Sills : Aluminum, mill finish . � _ x 18. Hall Fixtures : Satin stainless steel, No.4 finish . . $ 20. Additional Req�airements ' z: � a. Provide inspection certificate in each car, mounted under acrylic cover with frame i made from satin stainless steel, No.4 finish . � b. Provide blanket hooks and one complete set(s) of full-height protective blankets. � � ; PART 3-EXECUTION � } 3.1 EXAMINATION - ;: A. Examine elevator areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for � installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Verify critical dimensions ;! and examine supporting structure and other conditions under which elevator work is to be ; installed. � � F 1. For the record, prepare a written report, endorsed by Installer, listing dimensional � discrepancies and conditions detrimental to performance or indicating that dimensions s and conditions were found to be satisfactory. � 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. � HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-8 � OZ Architecture Boulder, CO = FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL,COLORADO MARCH 4,2010 3.2 INSTALLATION E. Install cylinder plumb and accurately centered for elevator car position and travel. Anchor securely in place, supported at pit floor and braced at intervals as needed to maintain alignment. Anchor cylinder guides at spacing needed to maintain alignment and avoid overstressing guides. F. Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for installing elevator work where bolted connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment, inspection, maintenance, and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS standards for workmanship and for qualifications of welding operators. G. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts designed to effectively prevent transmission of vibrations to stn.icture and thereby eliminate sources of structure-borne noise from elevator system. H. Install piping above the floor,where possible. Where not possible, install underground piping in Schedule 40 PVC pipe casing assembled with solvent-cemented fittings. J. Lubricate operating parts of systems as recommended by manufacturers. K. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails for accurate alignment of entrances with car. Where possible, delay installation of sills and frames until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum, safe, workable dimension at each landing. L. Leveling Tolerance: 1/4 inch, up or down, regardless of load and direction of travel. M. Set sills flush with finished floor surFace at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. N. Locate hall signal equipment for elevators as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 2. Place hall lanterns either above or beside each hoistway entrance. 3. Mount hall lanterns at a minimum of 72 inches above finished floor. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting use (either temporary or permanent) of elevators, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by ASME A17.1 and by governing regulations and agencies. B. Advise Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction in advance of dates and times tests are to be performed on elevators. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to operate elevator(s). Check operation of elevator with Owner's personnel present and before date of Substantial Completion. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-9 OZ Architecture Boulder, CO � t k FIRST CHAIR PERMIT SET VAIL, COLORADO MARCH 4, 2010 � C. Check operation of elevator with Owner's personnel present not more than one month before � � end of warranty period. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning � properly. �' END OF SECTION 14240 F i � E t F _ $ � � Y �. � f j. }: � � � i HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-10 � OZ Architecture Boulder,CO ;: { E